WO2018096942A1 - Electronic device, control device, control program, and operation method of electronic device - Google Patents

Electronic device, control device, control program, and operation method of electronic device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018096942A1
WO2018096942A1 PCT/JP2017/040518 JP2017040518W WO2018096942A1 WO 2018096942 A1 WO2018096942 A1 WO 2018096942A1 JP 2017040518 W JP2017040518 W JP 2017040518W WO 2018096942 A1 WO2018096942 A1 WO 2018096942A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
electronic device
unit
indoor
identification
user
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2017/040518
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
上野 泰弘
茂輝 田辺
英樹 森田
功 益池
浩太郎 山内
学 佐久間
健史 島田
Original Assignee
京セラ株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2017058103A external-priority patent/JP6713943B2/en
Application filed by 京セラ株式会社 filed Critical 京セラ株式会社
Priority to CN201780071461.XA priority Critical patent/CN109964472A/en
Priority to EP17873590.8A priority patent/EP3528479A4/en
Publication of WO2018096942A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018096942A1/en
Priority to US16/418,666 priority patent/US11460303B2/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01CMEASURING DISTANCES, LEVELS OR BEARINGS; SURVEYING; NAVIGATION; GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS; PHOTOGRAMMETRY OR VIDEOGRAMMETRY
    • G01C21/00Navigation; Navigational instruments not provided for in groups G01C1/00 - G01C19/00
    • G01C21/20Instruments for performing navigational calculations
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W4/00Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
    • H04W4/02Services making use of location information

Definitions

  • This disclosure relates to electronic equipment.
  • an electronic device includes a communication unit that performs wireless communication, a storage unit, a first determination unit, and an indoor identification unit.
  • the storage unit stores, as registered identification information, identification information that is assigned to the first communication device capable of wireless communication by the communication unit and whose contents can be changed.
  • the first determination unit determines whether the reception identification information, which is the identification information assigned to the second communication device, received by the communication unit from the second communication device matches the registered identification information.
  • the indoor identification unit performs indoor identification that identifies that the user of the electronic device is present indoors based on the first determination result in the first determination unit.
  • the control device is a control device that controls the operation of the electronic device provided in the electronic device that performs wireless communication.
  • the control device includes a determination unit and an indoor identification unit.
  • the determination unit is registered identification information that is registered in an electronic device and is assigned to a first communication device that can perform wireless communication with the electronic device, and is identification information that can change the contents thereof.
  • the indoor specifying unit that determines whether or not the reception identification information that is the identification information assigned to the second communication device that the electronic device receives from the second communication device via wireless communication matches the determination unit Based on the determination result, indoor identification is performed to identify that the user of the electronic device exists indoors.
  • control program is a control program for controlling an electronic device that performs wireless communication, and is for causing the electronic device to execute the first and second steps.
  • first step registered identification information that is registered in an electronic device and is assigned to a first communication device capable of performing wireless communication by the electronic device, and is identification information that can be changed. It is determined whether or not the reception identification information, which is the identification information assigned to the second communication device, received by the electronic device from the second communication device by wireless communication matches.
  • indoor identification that specifies that the user of the electronic device is present indoors is performed based on the determination result in the first step.
  • the operation method of the electronic device is an operation method of the electronic device that performs wireless communication, and includes first and second steps.
  • first step registered identification information that is registered in an electronic device and is assigned to a first communication device capable of performing wireless communication by the electronic device, and is identification information that can be changed. It is determined whether or not the reception identification information, which is the identification information assigned to the second communication device, received by the electronic device from the second communication device by wireless communication matches.
  • second step indoor identification that specifies that the user of the electronic device is present indoors is performed based on the determination result in the first step.
  • movement of an electronic device It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of an electronic device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a system in which the electronic device 10 is used.
  • the electronic device 10 is a mobile phone such as a smartphone, for example.
  • the electronic device 10 can be used in, for example, an intelligent road transport system (ITS).
  • ITS intelligent road transport system
  • the electronic device 10 can be used in an ITS safe driving support communication system 1.
  • the safe driving support communication system 1 is called a safe driving support system or a safe driving support wireless system.
  • a roadside device 5 disposed at an intersection 2 or the like, a vehicle 6 such as an automobile running on a roadway 7, and an electronic device held by a user 9 who is a pedestrian 10 can communicate with each other wirelessly.
  • the roadside machine 5, the vehicle 6, and the electronic device 10 can exchange information with each other.
  • the plurality of vehicles 6 can perform wireless communication with each other. Thereby, the plurality of vehicles 6 can exchange information with each other.
  • the roadside device 5 can notify the vehicle 6 and the electronic device 10 of information regarding lighting of the traffic light 4 and information regarding road regulations, for example. Moreover, the roadside machine 5 can detect the nearby vehicle 6 and a pedestrian. The roadside machine 5 arranged at the intersection 2 can detect a pedestrian crossing the pedestrian crossing 3, for example. And the roadside machine 5 can notify the information regarding the detected vehicle 6 and the pedestrian to the vehicle 6 and the electronic device 10. Further, the roadside machine 5 can notify the other vehicle 6 and the electronic device 10 of information notified from the vehicle 6 and the electronic device 10.
  • the vehicle 6 can notify the other vehicle 6, the roadside machine 5, and the electronic device 10 of information related to its own blinker, its own position, its own speed, and the like. And the vehicle 6 can assist a driver
  • the vehicle 6 can make various notifications to the driver using a speaker, a display device, and the like. For example, the vehicle 6 can make various notifications to the driver by using a car navigation device mounted on the vehicle 6.
  • the electronic device 10 can specify the state of the user 9.
  • the electronic device 10 can notify the roadside machine 5 and the like of information relating to the identified state of the user 9. The operation of the electronic device 10 will be described later in detail.
  • the safe driving support communication system 1 supports the safe driving of the driver of the vehicle 6 by performing road-to-vehicle communication, vehicle-to-vehicle communication, road-to-step communication, and vehicle-to-vehicle communication.
  • an automobile vehicle is shown as the vehicle 6, but the vehicle 6 may be a vehicle other than an automobile.
  • the vehicle 6 may be a bus vehicle or a tram vehicle.
  • the electronic device 10 can also be used in a system other than the safe driving support communication system 1.
  • Example of external appearance of electronic device 2 and 3 are a perspective view and a rear view showing an example of the appearance of the electronic device 10.
  • the electronic device 10 includes a plate-like device case 11 that is substantially rectangular in plan view.
  • the device case 11 constitutes the exterior of the electronic device 10.
  • a display area 12 for displaying various information such as characters, symbols, figures and the like is located on the front surface 11a of the device case 11.
  • a touch panel 130 described later is located on the back side of the display area 12. Accordingly, the user 9 can input various information to the electronic device 10 by operating the display area 12 on the front surface of the electronic device 10 with a finger or the like. Note that the user 9 can also input various types of information to the electronic device 10 by operating the display area 12 with an operator other than a finger, for example, a touch panel pen such as a stylus pen.
  • the receiver hole 13 is located at the upper end of the front surface 11a of the device case 11.
  • a speaker hole 14 is located at the lower end of the front surface 11a.
  • a microphone hole 15 is located on the lower side surface 11 c of the device case 11.
  • a lens 181 included in the first camera 180 described later is visible from the upper end portion of the front surface 11a of the device case 11.
  • a lens 191 included in a second camera 190 described later is visible from the upper end portion of the back surface 11 b of the device case 11.
  • the electronic device 10 includes an operation button group 220 (see FIG. 4 described later) including a plurality of operation buttons 22.
  • Each of the plurality of operation buttons 22 is, for example, a hardware button.
  • each of the plurality of operation buttons 22 is a push button.
  • at least one operation button 22 included in the operation button group 220 may be a software button displayed in the display area 12.
  • the operation button group 220 includes an operation button 22a, an operation button 22b, and an operation button 22c located at the lower end of the front surface 11a of the device case 11.
  • the operation button group 220 includes a power button and a volume button located on the surface of the device case 11.
  • the operation button 22a is, for example, a back button.
  • the back button is an operation button for switching the display in the display area 12 to the previous display.
  • the operation button 22b is, for example, a home button.
  • the home button is an operation button for displaying a home screen in the display area 12.
  • the operation button 22c is a history button, for example.
  • the history button is an operation button for causing the display area 12 to display a history of applications executed on the electronic device 10.
  • a history of applications executed on the electronic device 10 is displayed in the display area 12.
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram mainly showing an example of the electrical configuration of the electronic apparatus 10.
  • the electronic device 10 includes a control unit 100, a wireless communication unit 110, a display unit 120, an operation unit 210, and a satellite signal reception unit 140.
  • the electronic device 10 further includes a receiver 150, a speaker 160, a microphone 170, a first camera 180, a second camera 190, an acceleration sensor 200, and a battery 230. These components included in the electronic device 10 are housed in a device case 11.
  • the control unit 100 can comprehensively manage the operation of the electronic device 10 by controlling other components of the electronic device 10.
  • the control unit 100 can also be said to be a control device.
  • the controller 100 includes at least one processor to provide control and processing capabilities to perform various functions, as described in further detail below.
  • the at least one processor may be implemented as a single integrated circuit (IC) or as a plurality of communicatively connected integrated circuits ICs and / or discrete circuits. Good.
  • the at least one processor can be implemented according to various known techniques.
  • the processor includes one or more circuits or units configured to perform one or more data computation procedures or processes, for example, by executing instructions stored in associated memory.
  • the processor may be firmware (eg, a discrete logic component) configured to perform one or more data computation procedures or processes.
  • the processor may include one or more processors, controllers, microprocessors, microcontrollers, application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), digital signal processors, programmable logic devices, field programmable gate arrays, or the like.
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • digital signal processors programmable logic devices
  • field programmable gate arrays or the like.
  • the control unit 100 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 101, a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 102, and a storage unit 103.
  • the storage unit 103 includes a non-transitory recording medium that can be read by the CPU 101 and the DSP 102, such as a ROM (Read Only Memory) and a RAM (Random Access Memory).
  • the ROM included in the storage unit 103 is, for example, a flash ROM (flash memory) that is a nonvolatile memory.
  • the storage unit 103 stores a plurality of control programs 103 a for controlling the electronic device 10.
  • Various functions of the control unit 100 are realized by the CPU 101 and the DSP 102 executing various control programs 103 a in the storage unit 103.
  • control unit 100 may include a plurality of CPUs 101.
  • control unit 100 may include a main CPU that performs relatively complicated processing and a sub CPU that performs relatively simple processing.
  • control unit 100 may not include the DSP 102 or may include a plurality of DSPs 102.
  • all the functions of the control unit 100 or a part of the functions of the control unit 100 may be realized by a hardware circuit that does not require software to realize the function.
  • the storage unit 103 may include a computer-readable non-transitory recording medium other than the ROM and RAM.
  • the storage unit 103 may include, for example, a small hard disk drive and an SSD (Solid State Drive).
  • the plurality of control programs 103a in the storage unit 103 include various applications (application programs).
  • the storage unit 103 stores, for example, a call application for making a voice call and a video call, a browser for displaying a website, and a mail application for creating, browsing, and transmitting / receiving an e-mail.
  • the storage unit 103 also has a camera application for photographing a subject using the first camera 180 and the second camera 190, and a recorded image display application for displaying still images and moving images recorded in the storage unit 103.
  • a music reproduction control application for performing reproduction control of music data stored in the storage unit 103 is stored.
  • At least one application in the storage unit 103 may be stored in the storage unit 103 in advance. Further, at least one application in the storage unit 103 may be one that the electronic device 10 has downloaded from another device and stored in the storage unit 103.
  • the wireless communication unit 110 has an antenna 111.
  • the wireless communication unit 110 can use the antenna 111 to perform wireless communication using a plurality of types of communication methods, for example. Wireless communication of the wireless communication unit 110 is controlled by the control unit 100.
  • the wireless communication unit 110 can wirelessly communicate with a base station of a mobile phone system.
  • the wireless communication unit 110 can communicate with a mobile phone and a web server other than the electronic device 10 through a network such as the base station and the Internet.
  • the electronic device 10 can perform data communication, voice call, video call, and the like with another mobile phone or the like.
  • the wireless communication unit 110 can wirelessly communicate with the roadside machine 5 and the vehicle 6.
  • the wireless communication unit 110 can perform wireless communication using a wireless LAN (Local Area Network) such as WiFi.
  • the wireless communication unit 110 can perform short-range wireless communication.
  • the wireless communication unit 110 can perform wireless communication in conformity with Bluetooth (registered trademark).
  • the wireless communication unit 110 may be capable of performing wireless communication in accordance with at least one of ZigBee (registered trademark) and NFC (Near Field Communication).
  • the wireless communication unit 110 performs various processing such as amplification processing on the signal received by the antenna 111 and outputs the processed received signal to the control unit 100.
  • the control unit 100 performs various processes on the input received signal and acquires information included in the received signal.
  • the control unit 100 outputs a transmission signal including information to the wireless communication unit 110.
  • the wireless communication unit 110 performs various processing such as amplification processing on the input transmission signal, and wirelessly transmits the processed transmission signal from the antenna 111.
  • the display unit 120 includes a display area 12 located on the front surface of the electronic device 10 and a display panel 121.
  • the display unit 120 can display various information in the display area 12.
  • the display panel 121 is, for example, a liquid crystal display panel or an organic EL panel.
  • the display panel 121 can display various types of information such as characters, symbols, and figures by being controlled by the control unit 100.
  • the display panel 121 is opposed to the display area 12 in the device case 11. Information displayed on the display panel 121 is displayed in the display area 12.
  • the operation unit 210 can accept various operations of the user 9 with respect to the electronic device 10.
  • the operation unit 210 includes a touch panel 130 and an operation button group 220.
  • the touch panel 130 can detect an operation with an operator such as a finger on the display area 12.
  • the touch panel 130 is, for example, a projected capacitive touch panel.
  • the touch panel 130 is located on the back side of the display area 12, for example.
  • the control unit 100 can specify the content of the operation performed on the display area 12 based on the electrical signal output from the touch panel 130. And the control part 100 can perform the process according to the specified operation content.
  • Satellite signal receiving unit 140 can receive a satellite signal transmitted by a positioning satellite. Then, the satellite signal receiving unit 140 can acquire position information indicating the position of the electronic device 10 based on the received satellite signal.
  • the position information acquired by the satellite signal receiving unit 140 includes, for example, latitude and longitude indicating the position of the electronic device 10.
  • the control unit 100 can operate the satellite signal receiving unit 140 or stop its operation.
  • the satellite signal receiving unit 140 may be simply referred to as a “receiving unit 140”.
  • the receiving unit 140 is a GPS receiver, for example, and can receive a radio signal from a GPS (Global Positioning System) positioning satellite.
  • the receiving unit 140 calculates the current position of the electronic device 10 based on the received wireless signal, for example, using latitude and longitude, and outputs position information including the calculated latitude and longitude to the control unit 100. It can be said that the position information of the electronic device 10 is position information indicating the position of the user 9 having the electronic device 10.
  • the receiving unit 140 may obtain the position information of the electronic device 10 based on a signal from a positioning satellite of GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System) other than GPS.
  • GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System
  • the receiving unit 140 is based on signals from positioning satellites of GLONASS (Global Navigation Satellite System), IRNSS (Indian Regional Navigation Satellite System), COMPASS, Galileo, or Quasi-Zenith Satellite System (QZSS).
  • the position information of the electronic device 10 may be obtained.
  • the microphone 170 can convert a sound input from the outside of the electronic device 10 into an electrical sound signal and output it to the control unit 100. Sound from the outside of the electronic device 10 is taken into the electronic device 10 through the microphone hole 15 and input to the microphone 170.
  • the speaker 160 is, for example, a dynamic speaker.
  • the speaker 160 can convert an electrical sound signal from the control unit 100 into a sound and output the sound. Sound output from the speaker 160 is output from the speaker hole 14 to the outside. The user 9 can hear the sound output from the speaker hole 14 even at a place away from the electronic device 10.
  • the receiver 150 can output a received sound.
  • the receiver 150 is, for example, a dynamic speaker.
  • the receiver 150 can convert an electrical sound signal from the control unit 100 into sound and output the sound.
  • the sound output from the receiver 150 is output from the receiver hole 13 to the outside.
  • the volume of the sound output from the receiver hole 13 is smaller than the volume of the sound output from the speaker hole 14.
  • the user 9 can hear the sound output from the receiver hole 13 by bringing his ear close to the receiver hole 13.
  • a vibration element such as a piezoelectric vibration element that vibrates the front surface portion of the device case 11 may be provided. In this case, the sound is transmitted to the user by the vibration of the front portion.
  • the first camera 180 includes a lens 181 and an image sensor.
  • the second camera 190 includes a lens 191 and an image sensor. Each of the first camera 180 and the second camera 190 can photograph a subject based on control by the control unit 100, generate a still image or a moving image indicating the photographed subject, and output the still image or moving image to the control unit 100. .
  • the lens 181 of the first camera 180 is visible from the front surface 11a of the device case 11. Therefore, the first camera 180 can shoot a subject existing on the front side of the electronic device 10 (in other words, on the display area 12 side).
  • the first camera 180 is called an in camera.
  • the lens 191 of the second camera 190 is visible from the back surface 11 b of the device case 11. Therefore, the second camera 190 can photograph a subject existing on the back side of the electronic device 10.
  • the second camera 190 is called an out camera.
  • the acceleration sensor 200 can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 10.
  • the acceleration sensor 200 is, for example, a triaxial acceleration sensor.
  • the acceleration sensor 200 can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 10 in the x-axis direction, the y-axis direction, and the z-axis direction.
  • the x-axis direction, the y-axis direction, and the z-axis direction are set, for example, in the longitudinal direction, the short direction, and the thickness direction of the electronic device 10, respectively.
  • the battery 230 can output the power supply of the electronic device 10.
  • the battery 230 is, for example, a rechargeable battery.
  • the power output from the battery 230 is supplied to various components such as the control unit 100 and the wireless communication unit 110 included in the electronic device 10.
  • the electronic device 10 may not include the acceleration sensor 200.
  • the electronic device 10 may be connected to an acceleration sensor separate from the electronic device 10 wirelessly or by wire.
  • the electronic device 10 may include a sensor other than the acceleration sensor 200.
  • the electronic device 10 may include at least one of an atmospheric pressure sensor, a geomagnetic sensor, a temperature sensor, a proximity sensor, an illuminance sensor, and a gyro sensor.
  • the electronic device 10 may be connected to a sensor other than the acceleration sensor 200 other than the acceleration sensor 200 wirelessly or by wire.
  • the electronic device 10 may not include the receiving unit 140.
  • the electronic device 10 may be connected to a receiving unit 140 separate from the electronic device 10 wirelessly or by wire.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of a part of functional blocks formed when the CPU 101 and the DSP 102 execute the control program 103 a in the storage unit 103.
  • the control unit 100 includes a step count measuring unit 300, a state specifying unit 400, an identification information determining unit 500, and a notification determining unit 600 as functional blocks. At least one of the step count measurement unit 300, the state identification unit 400, the identification information determination unit 500, and the notification determination unit 600 may be realized by a hardware circuit that does not require software for executing the function.
  • the state specifying unit 400 can specify various states for the user 9.
  • the state specifying unit 400 includes, for example, a stop movement specifying unit 410, an indoor specifying unit 420, and a position determining unit 430. At least one of the stop movement specifying unit 410, the indoor specifying unit 420, and the position determining unit 430 may be realized by a hardware circuit that does not require software to execute the function.
  • control unit 100 includes a main CPU and a sub CPU
  • some of the functional blocks shown in FIG. 5 are realized by the sub CPU, and the remaining functional blocks are the main CPU. It may be realized with.
  • the stop movement specifying unit 410 may be realized by a sub CPU, and the remaining functional blocks may be realized by a main CPU.
  • the stop movement specifying unit 410 can specify stop movement specifying the state of the user 9 regarding the stop and movement of the user 9.
  • the stop movement specifying unit 410 can specify that the user 9 is stopped and the user 9 is moving in the stop movement specification. In other words, the stop movement specifying unit 410 can determine whether the state of the user 9 is a stopped state or a moving state. In other words, the stop movement specifying unit 410 can determine whether or not the user 9 is moving. Since the stop of the user 9 can be regarded as a stop of the electronic device 10, the stop movement specifying unit 410 can be said to function as a determination unit that determines whether or not the electronic device 10 is stopped. For example, the stop movement specifying unit 410 is based on the fact that the user 9 has stopped and the user 9 has moved based on at least one of the position information acquired by the receiving unit 140 and the acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200. It is possible to specify that
  • the stop movement specifying unit 410 can specify the stop of the user 9 and the start of movement of the user 9 in the stop movement specification.
  • the stop movement specifying unit 410 determines that the user 9 has stopped. Further, when the state of the user 9 changes from the stopped state to the moving state, the stop movement specifying unit 410 determines that the user 9 has started moving.
  • the stop movement specifying unit 410 can specify a stop of movement of the electronic device 10.
  • the stop movement specifying unit 410 can specify the start of movement of the electronic device 10.
  • the stop movement specifying unit 410 can specify the moving means of the user 9 when determining that the user 9 is moving in the stop movement specifying. For example, based on the acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200, the stop movement specifying unit 410 determines whether the user 9 is moving on his own without riding on the vehicle, or whether the user 9 is moving on the vehicle. Can be identified. Here, the fact that the user 9 moves on his own means that the user 9 moves on his / her foot without getting on the vehicle. If the movement of the user 9 by himself / herself is referred to as “self-movement”, it can be said that the stop movement specifying unit 410 can specify the user 9's own movement. In addition, when the movement of the user 9 on the vehicle is referred to as “vehicle movement”, the stop movement specifying unit 410 can specify the vehicle movement of the user 9.
  • the self-movement that can be specified by the stop movement specifying unit 410 includes that the user 9 walks and the user 9 runs and moves.
  • the self-moving includes walking and running.
  • the vehicle movement that can be specified by the stop movement specifying unit 410 the user 9 can move by bicycle and the user 9 can move faster than a bicycle such as a car, a train, and a bus. Moving with a simple vehicle.
  • vehicle means a vehicle that can move faster than a bicycle.
  • self is used as the name of the moving means when the user 9 moves by himself
  • walking is used as the name of the moving means when the user 9 moves by walking, and the user 9 runs and moves.
  • Un is used as the name of the moving means in the case.
  • the acceleration of the electronic device 10 shows a unique temporal change pattern according to the moving means of the user 9 having the electronic device 10.
  • the stop movement specifying unit 410 specifies that the moving means of the user 9 is “walking” when the pattern of the time change in acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200 indicates a pattern corresponding to “walking”.
  • the stop movement specifying unit 410 specifies that the moving means of the user 9 is “running” when the pattern of the time change of acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200 indicates a pattern corresponding to “running”. To do.
  • the stop movement specifying unit 410 specifies that the moving means of the user 9 is “bicycle” when the temporal change pattern of acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200 indicates a pattern corresponding to “bicycle”. To do.
  • the stop movement specifying unit 410 specifies that the moving means of the user 9 is the “vehicle” when the pattern of the time change of the acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200 indicates a pattern corresponding to the “vehicle”. To do.
  • the stop movement specifying unit 410 can specify whether the moving means of the user 9 is walking, running, bicycle, or vehicle.
  • the control unit 100 can cause the display unit 120 to display the moving means specified by the stop movement specifying unit 410 and the moving distance of the user 9 (in other words, the moving distance of the electronic device 10).
  • the user 9 can distinguish and confirm the walking distance, the travel distance, the travel distance by bicycle, and the travel distance by vehicle.
  • the control unit 100 can obtain the moving distance of the user 9 based on the position information acquired by the receiving unit 140.
  • the indoor specifying unit 420 can specify that the user 9 exists in a building such as a house, a building, or a store. That is, the indoor specifying unit 420 can perform indoor specifying that specifies that the user 9 exists indoors.
  • a building such as a house, a building, or a store. That is, the indoor specifying unit 420 can perform indoor specifying that specifies that the user 9 exists indoors.
  • the presence of the user 9 indoors may be simply referred to as “indoor”, and the absence of the user 9 indoors may be simply referred to as “outdoor”.
  • the indoor identification will be described in detail later.
  • the position determination unit 430 can determine whether or not the user 9 is located in a predetermined area (in other words, a predetermined place). In other words, the position determination unit 430 can determine whether or not the electronic device 10 is located in a predetermined area (in other words, a predetermined place).
  • a predetermined region for example, a region including a place where an accident between a pedestrian and the vehicle 6 easily occurs and a region including the vicinity thereof are employed.
  • the predetermined area includes, for example, an intersection area including the intersection 2 and the vicinity thereof, a T-junction area including the T-junction and the vicinity thereof, and a school commuting area including the child's school road and the vicinity thereof.
  • the position determination unit 430 individually determines whether the user 9 is located in the intersection area, whether the user 9 is located in the T-junction area, and whether the user 9 is located in the school road area. can do.
  • the position determination unit 430 can determine whether or not the user 9 is located in a predetermined area based on the position information acquired by the reception unit 140 and the map information stored in the storage unit 103. It is. Further, the position determination unit 430 determines whether or not the user 9 is located in a predetermined area based on whether or not the wireless communication unit 110 can receive a signal from the roadside device 5 arranged at the intersection 2 or the like. May be.
  • the state specifying unit 400 can specify various states for the user 9. Note that the type of state of the user 9 specified by the state specifying unit 400 is not limited to the above.
  • the step count measuring unit 300 can measure the number of steps of the user 9 moving by himself.
  • the step count measuring unit 300 measures, for example, the number of steps of the user 9 moving by himself / herself based on the acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200.
  • the step count measuring unit 300 measures the number of steps of the user 9 when the stop movement specifying unit 410 specifies that the user 9 is walking or running.
  • the control unit 100 can display the number of steps measured by the step count measuring unit 300 on the display unit 120.
  • the identification information determination unit 500 determines whether or not the registration identification information stored in the storage unit 103 matches the identification information assigned to the communication device received by the wireless communication unit 110 from the communication device. .
  • the determination result in the identification information determination unit 500 is used for indoor identification. The operation of the identification information determination unit 500 will be described in detail later.
  • the notification determination unit 600 can perform a determination process for determining whether or not the electronic device 10 notifies the outside of the electronic device 10 based on the state of the user 9 specified by the state specifying unit 400. is there.
  • the notification determination unit 600 includes the electronic device 10. The electronic device 10 decides to make a notification to the outside.
  • the notification determining unit 600 includes the electronic device 10. The electronic device 10 decides to make a notification to the outside.
  • the notification determining unit 600 determines that the electronic device 10 notifies the outside of the electronic device 10, for example, the user 9 (pedestrian) is notified that the user 9 (pedestrian) is nearby to the vehicle 6 located in the intersection area. Presence notification information for this is notified from the wireless communication unit 110 to the roadside device 5.
  • the presence notification information may include information indicating the moving means of the user 9 specified by the stop movement specifying unit 410.
  • the roadside machine 5 transmits the received presence notification information to the vehicle 6 existing in the intersection area. At this time, the roadside device 5 transmits the presence notification information by broadcast, for example. The vehicle 6 warns the driver, for example, based on the received presence notification information.
  • the vehicle 6 notifies the driver that a pedestrian is nearby using, for example, a car navigation device. Thereby, the driver of the vehicle 6 existing in the intersection area can drive while recognizing that a person exists in the intersection area. As a result, the driving safety of the vehicle 6 is improved.
  • the notification by the electronic device 10 to the outside of the electronic device 10 may be referred to as “notification execution”. Also, the fact that the electronic device 10 does not notify the outside of the electronic device 10 may be referred to as “notification non-execution”.
  • the content of the information notified to the outside by the electronic device 10 is not limited to the above example.
  • the electronic device 10 can also notify the vehicle 6 directly.
  • BSSID Basic Service Set Identifier
  • BSSID is information unique to each access point. The user of the access point cannot change the contents of the BSSID assigned to the access point. For example, a MAC address is adopted as the BSSID. Information other than the MAC address may be adopted for the BSSID.
  • identification information called ESSID (Extended SSID) is also assigned to the access point.
  • the ESSID is sometimes called a network name.
  • the user of the access point can change the contents of the network name assigned to the access point. For example, the user can change the contents of the network name assigned to the access point by operating the access point.
  • the access point can wirelessly periodically transmit the BSSID and network name assigned to the access point, for example, by broadcast.
  • the electronic device 10 can receive both the BSSID and the network name from the access point.
  • the network names of a plurality of access points provided in one building may be set to be the same. That is, a common network name may be assigned to a plurality of access points provided in one building. For example, when a plurality of access points are arranged in a building of a company office, the name of the office may be adopted as the network name of the plurality of access points. It can be said that the network name commonly assigned to a plurality of access points is a group name of a group formed by the plurality of access points.
  • a certain network name is registered in the storage unit 103 as a registered network name. It can be said that the registered network name is registered identification information. The registration method of the registered network name will be described later.
  • the control unit 100 determines whether or not the network name (identification information) received by the wireless communication unit 110 from the access point matches the registered network name (registration identification information) in the storage unit 103, and the determination result Based on the indoor identification.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic device 10 that executes processing relating to indoor identification (hereinafter, “indoor identification related processing”).
  • the electronic device 10 repeatedly executes the indoor identification related process shown in FIG. 6 periodically or irregularly.
  • step s1 the control unit 100 determines whether or not the wireless communication unit 110 has received a network name. In other words, the control unit 100 determines whether or not the network name has been acquired from the received signal at the wireless communication unit 110. Step s1 is executed until it is determined that the wireless communication unit 110 has received the network name.
  • the identification information determination unit 500 displays the network name received from the access point by the wireless communication unit 110 (hereinafter “received network name”). It is determined whether or not the registered network name in the storage unit 103 matches. If it is determined in step s2 that the received network name and the registered network name do not match, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received network name matches the registered network name, in step s3, the indoor specifying unit 420 determines that the user 9 exists indoors. When step s3 is executed, the indoor identification related process ends.
  • step s1 If it is determined in step s1 that a plurality of network names have been received, it is determined in step s2 whether or not each of the plurality of network names matches the registered network name. In step s3, if it is determined that at least one of the plurality of network names matches the registered network name, it is determined as “indoor”. On the other hand, if all of the plurality of network names do not match the registered network name, the indoor identification related process ends.
  • a plurality of registered network names may be registered in the storage unit 103. In this case, if the received network name matches any of a plurality of registered network names, it is determined as “indoor”. If it is determined in step s1 that a plurality of network names have been received, if the plurality of network names include a network name that matches any of the plurality of registered network names, it is determined to be “indoor”.
  • a common network name may be assigned to a plurality of access points in the same building.
  • a network name commonly assigned to a plurality of access points in the same building hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “common network name”
  • the receiving network name is When the name matches the registered network name, the wireless communication unit 110 is likely to be communicating with an indoor access point. Therefore, when the receiving network name matches the registered network name, there is a high possibility that the user 9 is present indoors.
  • Step s3 is executed to determine “indoor”.
  • the indoor identifying unit 420 determines “indoor”.
  • the indoor specifying unit 420 specifies that the user 9 exists indoors based on the determination result of whether or not the received network name matches the registered network name. It can be specified more accurately.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state in which a user 9 having the electronic device 10 is present in a building 700 provided with a plurality of access points.
  • a room 711 and a room 712 exist in the first floor portion 710 of the building 700
  • a room 721 and a room 722 exist in the second floor portion 720 of the building 700.
  • a plurality of access points 801 to 804 are provided in the room 711, the room 712, the room 721, and the room 722, respectively.
  • a common network name is assigned to the plurality of access points 801 to 804.
  • the common network names assigned to the access points 801 to 804 are registered as registered network names.
  • the indoor identifying unit 420 determines that the user 9 is present indoors. Further, even when the user 9 moves from the room 721 of the second floor portion 720 to the room 712 of the first floor portion 710, the reception network name received by the wireless communication unit 110, the registered network name in the storage unit 103, and Match. Therefore, the indoor identifying unit 420 determines that the user 9 is present indoors. Even if the user 9 exists in any of the room 711, the room 712, the room 721, and the room 722, the indoor specifying unit 420 can specify that the user 9 exists indoors.
  • the BSSID of the access point 803 is registered in the storage unit 103 as a registered BSSID.
  • the BSSID received by the wireless communication unit 110 and the registered BSSID match, so that the indoor identification is determined as “indoor”.
  • the BSSID received by the wireless communication unit 110 and the registered BSSID do not match. Therefore, although the user 9 exists in the room 712, it is not determined as “indoor” in the indoor identification.
  • the user can communicate with any of the plurality of access points with the electronic device 10. It can be correctly specified that 9 exists indoors. Therefore, the performance of the electronic device 10 is further improved.
  • the operation mode of the electronic device 10 includes a registration mode for registering a network name.
  • the operation mode of the electronic device 10 is changed to the registration mode.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic device 10 in the registration mode.
  • the control unit 100 causes the display unit 120 to display a list of network names received by the wireless communication unit 110 in step s11.
  • the operation unit 210 accepts a registration instruction operation of the user 9 for instructing to register the network name displayed on the display unit 120 in the electronic device 10 as a registered network name.
  • the control unit 100 registers the network name designated by the registration instruction operation received in step s12 in the storage unit 103. As a result, the registered network name is stored in the storage unit 103. Thereafter, for example, when a predetermined operation is performed on the display area 12, the registration mode is canceled.
  • the registration instruction operation for example, a tap operation on the network name displayed in the display area 12 can be considered.
  • the user 9 specifies the common network name as a registration target by tapping the common network name among the network names displayed in the display area 12.
  • the designated common network name is registered in the storage unit 103 in step s13.
  • the display unit 120 displays the common network names of the access points 801 to 804. Is displayed.
  • the common network name is registered in the storage unit 103 as a registered network name.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic device 10 in this case.
  • the electronic device 10 repeatedly executes the registration process shown in FIG. 9 periodically or irregularly.
  • step s21 the control unit 100 determines whether or not the wireless communication unit 110 has received a network name. Step s21 is executed until it is determined that the wireless communication unit 110 has received the network name.
  • step s21 If it is determined in step s21 that the wireless communication unit 110 has received the network name, the stop movement specifying unit 410 of the control unit 100 determines whether or not the electronic device 10 is stopped in step s22. If it is determined in step s22 that the electronic device 10 has not stopped, the registration process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s22 that the electronic device 10 is stopped, in step s23, the control unit 100 registers the network name received in step s21 in the storage unit 103 as a registered network name. However, if the network name received in step s21 has already been registered, the network name is not registered. When the electronic device 10 is stopped, there is a high possibility that the user 9 is present indoors.
  • the wireless communication unit 110 receives a network name from an access point when the electronic device 10 is stopped, the access point is likely to exist indoors. Therefore, by using the network name received by the wireless communication unit 110 when the electronic device 10 is stopped as the registered network name, the common network name assigned to the plurality of network names existing indoors is the registered network name. Is likely to be. For example, when the electronic device 10 is placed on a desk or the like in the room 712 shown in FIG. 7, a network name common to the access points 801 to 804 is registered in the storage unit 103 as a registered network name.
  • step s25 may be executed instead of step s22.
  • the control unit 100 determines whether the wireless communication unit 110 has received a network name in a predetermined time zone. In other words, the control unit 100 determines whether or not the reception time of the network name in step s21 is included in the predetermined time zone.
  • a predetermined time zone a time zone in which there is a high possibility that the user 9 is indoors, for example, a midnight time zone can be considered.
  • a time zone in the middle of the night for example, a time zone from 11:00 pm to 2 am can be considered.
  • the control unit 100 estimates a time zone in which the user 9 is highly likely to be present indoors based on position information acquired by the reception unit 140, the network name is estimated in the estimated time zone. It may be determined whether or not is received.
  • step s25 when the control unit 100 determines that the wireless communication unit 110 has received a network name in a predetermined time zone, the control unit 100 executes step s23 and registers the network name in the storage unit 103 as a registered network name.
  • step s25 may be executed after step s22.
  • step s25 is executed. If it is determined in step s25 that the wireless communication unit 110 has received a network name in a predetermined time zone, the network name is registered in step s23. Note that the order of execution of steps s22 and s25 may be switched.
  • the convenience of the electronic device 10 is improved by automatically registering the network name in the electronic device 10.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the electronic device 10 until the electronic device 10 notifies the outside.
  • the electronic device 10 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 12 periodically or irregularly.
  • step s31 the position determination unit 430 determines whether or not the electronic device 10 is located in a predetermined area. If it is determined in step s31 that the electronic device 10 is located in the predetermined area, the stop movement specifying unit 410 performs stop movement specification in step s32. If it is not determined in step s31 that the electronic device 10 is located in the predetermined area, step s31 is executed again.
  • the notification determination unit 600 determines non-execution of the notification at step s35.
  • the moving means of the user 9 is a vehicle such as an automobile, a train, and a bus
  • the user 9 is likely to be safe with respect to the vehicle 6, and therefore warns the driver of the vehicle 6. It can be said that there is little necessity.
  • the notification determining unit 600 determines that the electronic device 10 does not notify the outside when the moving means of the user 9 is specified as a “vehicle”.
  • step s35 is executed, the electronic device 10 executes step s31 again and thereafter operates in the same manner.
  • step s34 is executed.
  • step s34 the notification determination unit 600 determines notification execution.
  • the notification determining unit 600 determines that the electronic device 10 notifies the outside when the moving means of the user 9 is specified as “running” or “bicycle”.
  • the notification determination unit 600 determines the notification execution, for example, the presence notification information as described above is notified from the wireless communication unit 110 to the roadside device 5.
  • the roadside device 5 notifies the received presence notification information to the vehicle 6 existing in the predetermined area. If it is determined in step s31 that the electronic device 10 is present in, for example, the T-junction region, the roadside machine 5 provided in the T-junction region uses the presence notification information received from the electronic device 10 as the T-junction region. Is notified to the vehicle 6 existing in the vehicle. The vehicle 6 warns the driver based on the received presence notification information.
  • the presence notification information may be directly notified from the electronic device 10 to the vehicle 6 existing in the T-junction region.
  • step s32 when it is specified that the user 9 is stopped, in step s33, is the control unit 100 determined to be “indoor” in the latest indoor specification in the indoor specification unit 420? Confirm whether or not.
  • the control unit 100 performs “ Check if it is determined to be “indoor”.
  • step s33 if it is confirmed that the latest indoor identification is determined as “indoor”, step s35 is executed and notification non-execution is determined.
  • step s35 is executed and notification non-execution is determined.
  • step s34 is executed and notification execution is determined.
  • step s34 is executed and notification execution is determined.
  • the notification determination unit 600 may determine to execute notification. In this case, for example, notification information for notifying that there is a low risk that the user 9 existing nearby will jump out on the roadway is notified from the electronic device 10 to the vehicle 6 via the roadside device 5 or directly. Also good.
  • step s32 may not be executed. In this case, if it is determined in step s31 that the electronic device 10 is present in the predetermined area, step s33 is executed.
  • step s31 may not be executed.
  • step s31 is not executed in the flow of FIG. 13, but step s31 may not be executed in the flow of FIG.
  • step s34 when step s34 is executed, step s32 is executed again, and when step s35 is executed, step s32 is executed again.
  • step s31 may be executed after step s38.
  • the control unit 100 confirms the latest indoor specific result. If it is determined in step s31 that the electronic device 10 is located in the predetermined area, in step s39, the notification determination unit 600 determines whether or not the electronic device 10 notifies the outside based on the result confirmed in step s38. A determination process is performed to determine In step s39, when it is determined as “indoor” in the latest indoor identification, the notification determination unit 600 determines not to execute notification. In addition, the notification determination unit 600 determines the notification execution when “indoor” is not determined in the latest indoor identification.
  • stop movement identification is not performed, but stop movement identification may be performed before step s31.
  • the notification determination unit 600 determines whether or not the electronic device 10 makes a notification to the outside based on the result of specifying stop movement and the result of confirmation in step s38. For example, the notification determining unit 600 determines not to execute notification when the moving means is specified as a “vehicle” in the stop movement specification. Further, the notification determining unit 600 determines not to execute notification when it is determined as “indoor” in the latest indoor identification. Further, the notification determining unit 600 determines the notification execution when the moving means is specified as “running” in the stop movement specification.
  • the notification determining unit 600 determines the notification execution when the moving means is specified as “bicycle” in the stop movement specification. Further, the notification determining unit 600 determines the notification execution when the moving means is specified as “walking” in the stop movement specification and it is not determined as “indoor” in the latest indoor specification. Then, the notification determination unit 600 determines the notification execution when it is determined that the user 9 is stopped by the stop movement specification and it is not determined “indoor” in the latest indoor specification.
  • the notification determination unit 600 determines whether or not the electronic device 10 makes a notification to the outside based on the indoor specific result, so that the electronic device 10 can make a notification that is not necessary to the outside. Can be reduced. Therefore, the convenience of the electronic device 10 is improved.
  • the notification determination unit 600 performs determination processing when the electronic device 10 is located in a predetermined area, and determination processing when the electronic device 10 is not located in the predetermined area. Therefore, the electronic device 10 can determine whether or not the electronic device 10 notifies the outside when necessary.
  • the operation of the electronic device 10 has been described on the assumption that the electronic device 10 is used in ITS, but the usage application of the electronic device 10 is not limited thereto.
  • the electronic device 10 can be used for any application as long as it is necessary to specify that the user 9 is present indoors.
  • FIG. 16 shows a state where the electronic device 10 possessed by the user 9 existing outside the building 700 can receive the network name from the access point 801 in the building 700.
  • the network name received by the electronic device 10 from the access point 801 matches the registered network name, it is erroneously determined that the user 9 is present indoors in indoor identification.
  • the reception intensity when the electronic device 10 receives the network name may be higher than when the user 9 exists outside the building 700. Is expensive.
  • the indoor identification unit 420 performs indoor identification based not only on the determination result of the identification information determination unit 500 but also on the reception strength of the reception network name.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the indoor identification related process according to this example.
  • the control unit 100 executes the above-described steps s1 and s2. If it is determined in step s2 that the received network name matches the registered network name, in step s41, the indoor identifying unit 420 determines whether the reception strength of the received network name received in step s1 is greater than or equal to a threshold value. Determine whether or not.
  • the wireless communication unit 110 can obtain the reception strength of the signal received by the wireless communication unit 110.
  • Examples of the reception strength required by the wireless communication unit 110 include RSSI (Received Signal Signal Strength Indicator).
  • the indoor identification unit 420 determines whether the reception strength of the received signal including the reception network name, that is, the reception strength of the reception network name, which is obtained by the wireless communication unit 110, is equal to or higher than a threshold value.
  • step s41 if it is determined that the reception strength of the reception network name is less than the threshold value, in other words, if it is determined that the reception strength of the reception network name is low, the indoor identification related process ends.
  • step s3 is executed, and the user 9 is indoors. Is determined to exist. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
  • the electronic device 10 possessed by the user 9 existing outside the certain building receives the network name from the access point in the certain building, the reception strength of the network name may be reduced. high. Therefore, when the reception network name matches the registered network name and the reception strength of the reception network name is high, it is possible to perform more accurate indoor identification by determining that the user 9 is indoors.
  • step s41 it may be determined whether the reception strength of the reception network name is greater than a threshold value. In this case, when the reception strength of the reception network name is equal to or lower than the threshold value, the indoor identification related process ends. If the reception strength of the reception network name is greater than the threshold value, it is determined as “indoor” in step s3.
  • the threshold value used in step s41 may be determined based on the reception strength of the network name when receiving the network name registered in the electronic device 10, or may be determined based on other criteria. Good.
  • the indoor identification unit 420 performs indoor identification based on the determination result of the identification information determination unit 500 and the reception strength of the reception network name, and thus the user 9 exists indoors. Can be specified more correctly.
  • the network name of the indoor access point registered as the registered network name may coincide with the network name of the outdoor access point by chance. Therefore, even when the user 9 is outdoors, the reception network name and the registered network name may match. Therefore, in the indoor identification, there is a possibility that it is erroneously determined that the user 9 is present indoors.
  • the location of an access point in a building may be close to the location of another access point in the building and far from the location of another access point located outside the building. Is expensive. Therefore, the position of the electronic device 10 when receiving a network name from an access point existing in a certain building is the position of the electronic device 10 when receiving a network name from another access point existing in the certain building. There is a high possibility that the electronic device 10 is far from the location when the network name from another access point located outside the certain building is received.
  • position information indicating the position of the electronic device 10 when the wireless communication unit 110 receives a network name registered in the electronic device 10 is registered in the storage unit 103 as registered position information.
  • the position information acquired by the receiving unit 140 when the operation unit 210 receives a registration instruction operation is registered in the storage unit 103 as registered position information.
  • the registration process shown in FIGS. 9 to 11 is executed, for example, the position information acquired by the receiving unit 140 when step s23 is executed is registered in the storage unit 103 as registered position information.
  • the network name from the access point 803 shown in FIG. 7 described above is registered in the storage unit 103, the registered position information is stored in the position of the electronic device 10 in the room 721, in other words, in the room 721.
  • the position of the existing user 9 is shown.
  • the registered position information in the storage unit 103 and the position information indicating the position of the electronic device 10 when the network name is received by the wireless communication unit 110 are compared. Based on the comparison result, the user 9 Is identified indoors.
  • FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the indoor identification related process according to this example.
  • the control unit 100 executes the above-described step s1. If it is determined in step s1 that the network name has been received, the control unit 100 acquires the latest position information from the reception unit 140 in step s51. This position information can be said to be position information indicating the position of the electronic device 10 when the network name received in step s1 is received.
  • step s52 the control unit 100 executes step s2. If it is determined in step s2 that the received network name matches the registered network name, in step s52, the position determination unit 430 determines that the position indicated by the position information acquired in step s51 is the registered position in the storage unit 103. It is determined whether or not it exists within a predetermined range from the position indicated by the information. In other words, the position determination unit 430 determines whether or not the position indicated by the position information acquired in step s51 is close to the position indicated by the registered position information in the storage unit 103.
  • the predetermined range in step s52 is set to about several m to 10 m, for example.
  • step s52 If it is determined in step s52 that the position indicated by the position information acquired in step s51 does not exist within a predetermined range from the position indicated by the registered position information in the storage unit 103, the indoor determination related process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the position indicated by the position information acquired in step s51 is within a predetermined range from the position indicated by the registered position information in the storage unit 103, step s3 is executed, and the user 9 moves indoors. Is determined to exist.
  • the position of the electronic device 10 at the time of reception of the reception network name is the electronic device at the time of reception of the registration network. If it is far from the position 10, the user 9 is not determined to be present indoors. Therefore, even if the network name of the indoor access point registered as the registered network name coincides with the network name of the outdoor access point that is located away from the access point by chance, the user 9 It is possible to reduce the possibility of being erroneously determined to be present indoors.
  • step s41 described above may be executed after step s52.
  • step s41 is executed.
  • step s41 if it is determined that the reception strength of the reception network name received in step s1 is greater than or equal to the threshold value, step s3 is executed to determine “indoor”.
  • the execution order of step s52 and step s41 may be switched.
  • the receiving network name and the registered network name match, and the position of the electronic device 10 when receiving the receiving network name is close to the position of the electronic device 10 when receiving the registered network, and the receiving network name
  • the registered position information may be position information indicating the position of the access point that transmits the registered network name.
  • the registered position information indicates the position of the access point 803.
  • the electronic device 10 transmits the network name to be registered from the server device.
  • the position information indicating the position of can be acquired. For example, when the operation unit 210 receives a registration instruction operation in step s12 of FIG. 8 described above, the electronic device 10 indicates the position of the access point that transmits the network name to be registered, which is designated by the registration instruction operation. Position information is acquired from the server device. When the registration process shown in FIGS. 9 to 11 is executed, the electronic device 10 indicates the position of the access point that transmits the network name to be registered, for example, when executing step s23. Position information is acquired from the server device.
  • the access point transmits the location information indicating the location of the access point together with the network name
  • the electronic device 10 receives the network name to be registered, the electronic device 10 transmits the network name of the access point.
  • Position information indicating the position can be acquired.
  • the location information acquired in step s51 may be location information indicating the location of the access point that transmits the reception network name.
  • the electronic device 10 can acquire position information indicating the position of the access point that transmits the reception network name from the server apparatus. Further, when the access point transmits the location information indicating the location of the access point together with the network name, the electronic device 10 receives the network name of the access point that transmits the reception network name. Position information indicating the position can be acquired.
  • the registered location information is location information indicating the location of the access point that transmits the registered network name
  • the location information acquired in step s51 indicates the location of the electronic device 10 when receiving the received network name.
  • the positional information shown may be sufficient.
  • the registered position information is position information indicating the position of the electronic device 10 when receiving the network name to be registered, and the position information acquired in step s51 indicates the position of the access point that transmits the received network name. It may be position information. Since the position of the access point and the position of the electronic device 10 that receives the network name from the access point are close to each other, the type of registered position information and the type of position information acquired in step s51 are as described above. They may be different from each other.
  • the electronic device 10 may be able to receive the network name from the access point of the building 700. Therefore, in the indoor identification, there is a possibility that the user 9 is determined to be “indoor” even though the user 9 does not exist indoors.
  • the user 9 may place the electronic device 10 on a desk or the like without having the electronic device 10.
  • the electronic device 10 determines whether or not the electronic device 10 is placed without being held by the user 9, and determines the determination result and the determination result in the identification information determination unit 500. Based on the indoor identification. This modification will be described in detail below.
  • the state in which the electronic device 10 is stopped includes the first state in which the electronic device 10 is stopped because the user who owns the electronic device 10 is stopped, and the electronic device 10 is not held by the user. And a second state that is stopped by being placed on a desk or the like.
  • first state is referred to as “first stop state”
  • second stop state is referred to as “second stop state”.
  • the stop movement specifying unit 410 determines whether or not the electronic device 10 is stopped without particularly distinguishing whether the electronic device 10 is in the first stop state or the second stop state.
  • the stop movement specifying unit 410 can distinguish and determine whether or not the electronic device 10 is in the first stop state and whether or not the electronic device 10 is in the second stop state.
  • the stop specifying unit 410 determines whether or not the electronic device 10 is in the first stop state based on a time change pattern of acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as an acceleration pattern). Whether it is 2 stop states or not can be distinguished and determined.
  • the acceleration pattern when the electronic device 10 is in the first stop state and the acceleration pattern when the electronic device 1 is in the second stop state are different from each other.
  • a time change pattern of acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200 when the electronic device 10 is in the first stop state is stored in advance as a first reference pattern.
  • the storage unit 103 stores in advance a time change pattern of acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200 when the electronic device 10 is in the second stop state as a second reference pattern.
  • the stop movement specifying unit 410 determines that the electronic device 10 is in the first stop state.
  • the stop movement specifying unit 410 determines that the electronic device 1 is not in the first stop state.
  • specification part 410 determines with the electronic device 10 being a 2nd stop state, when an acceleration pattern corresponds to a 2nd reference pattern. On the other hand, when the acceleration pattern does not match the second reference pattern, the stop movement specifying unit 410 determines that the electronic device 10 is not in the second stop state.
  • FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the indoor identification related process according to this example.
  • the control unit 100 executes the above-described steps s1 and s2. If it is determined in step s2 that the received network name matches the registered network name, the stop movement specification 410 acquires acceleration from the acceleration sensor 200 in step s61. In step s62, the stop movement specifying unit 410 determines, based on the acquired acceleration, whether or not the electronic device 10 is in the second stop state within a predetermined period after the network name is received in step s1. .
  • the stop movement specifying unit 410 repeatedly executes a state determination process for determining whether or not the electronic device 1 is in the second stop state within a predetermined period after the network name is received in step s1. If the stop movement specifying unit 410 determines in the state determination process that the electronic device 1 is in the second stop state, the electronic device 1 is in the second stop state within a predetermined time after the network name is received in step s1. It is determined that On the other hand, if the stop movement specifying unit 410 does not determine that the electronic device 1 is in the second stop state even once in the state determination process that is repeatedly performed, the stop movement specifying unit 410 receives the electronic information within a predetermined time after the network name is received in step s1. It is determined that the device 1 has never been in the second stop state.
  • step s62 If it is determined NO in step s62, the indoor identification related process is terminated. On the other hand, if it determines with YES in step s62, step s3 will be performed and it will be determined that the user 9 exists indoors. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
  • the indoor identification unit 420 performs indoor identification based on the determination result of the identification information determination unit 500 and the determination result of whether or not the electronic device 10 is in the second stop state. Therefore, it can be more correctly specified that the user 9 exists indoors.
  • the process composed of step s61 and step s62 may be referred to as “stop determination process”.
  • the stop identifying unit 410 can determine whether the electronic device 10 is in the first stop state and whether it is in the second stop state, In step s22 of FIG.9 and FIG.11, it may be determined whether the electronic device 10 is a 1st stop state, and it may be determined whether the electronic device 10 is a 2nd stop state. .
  • the electronic device 10 determines whether or not the electronic device 10 is charged, and performs indoor identification based on the determination result and the determination result in the identification information determination unit 500. This example will be described in detail below.
  • FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of indoor identification related processing according to this example.
  • the control unit 100 executes the above-described steps s1 and s2. If it is determined in step s2 that the received network name matches the registered network name, in step s71, the control unit 100 determines whether or not the electronic device 10 is charged. That is, the control unit 100 determines whether or not the battery 230 is charged. For example, the control unit 100 can determine whether or not the battery 230 is charged by monitoring the voltage or current of a specific terminal of the connector to which the charger is connected, which is included in the electronic device 10. .
  • step s71 If it is determined in step s71 that the electronic device 10 is not charged, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s71 that the electronic device 10 is charged, step s3 is executed and it is determined that the user 9 is present indoors. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
  • the indoor identification unit 420 performs indoor identification based on the determination result of the identification information determination unit 500 and the determination result of whether or not the electronic device 10 is charged. It can be specified more correctly that the user 9 exists indoors.
  • the process of step s71 may be referred to as “charging determination process”.
  • Smart home appliances include, for example, televisions, refrigerators, game machines, rice cookers, DVD recorders, vacuum cleaners, microwave ovens, oven toasters, electric fans, air conditioners, air purifiers, humidifiers, personal computers, facsimiles and lighting. An instrument etc. can be considered.
  • the electronic device 10 When the user 9 is present in a building such as a home, the electronic device 10 is highly likely to be able to receive information from a smart home appliance present in the building.
  • the electronic device 10 performs indoor identification based on the determination result in the identification information determination unit 500 and information received from the smart home appliance. This example will be described in detail below.
  • FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of indoor identification related processing according to this example.
  • the control unit 100 executes the above-described steps s1 and s2. If it determines with YES in step s2, the indoor specific
  • step s81 If it is determined in step s81 that the electronic device 10 can communicate with the smart home appliance, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s81 that the electronic device 10 cannot communicate with the smart home appliance, step s3 is executed and it is determined that the user 9 is present indoors. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
  • the indoor identification unit 420 can determine whether or not the electronic device 10 can communicate with the smart home appliance by various methods. For example, in the same manner as in FIG. 8 described above, identification information such as BSSID or network name transmitted by the smart home appliance in the building is registered in the electronic device 10 as registered home appliance identification information. When the wireless communication unit 110 receives the identification information in step s81, the indoor identification unit 420 determines whether or not the received identification information matches the registered home appliance identification information. If the indoor identification unit 420 determines that the two match, the indoor specifying unit 420 determines that the electronic device 1 can communicate with the smart home appliance in the building. On the other hand, if indoor specifying unit 420 determines that the two do not match, it determines that electronic device 1 cannot communicate with the smart home appliance.
  • identification information such as BSSID or network name transmitted by the smart home appliance in the building is registered in the electronic device 10 as registered home appliance identification information.
  • the indoor identification unit 420 determines whether or not the received identification information matches the registered home appliance identification information. If the indoor identification
  • the indoor identifying unit 420 can determine that the electronic device 10 can communicate with the smart home appliance when the wireless communication unit 110 receives the notification information.
  • the electronic device 10 stores connection information necessary for communication connection with the smart home appliance by communicating with the smart home appliance in the building in advance.
  • the indoor identification unit 420 may determine that the electronic device 10 can communicate with the smart home appliance.
  • the indoor specifying unit 420 performs indoor specifying based on the determination result of the identification information determining unit 500 and the information received by the wireless communication unit 110 from the home appliance, and thus the user 9 Can be more accurately identified as being present indoors.
  • the power-on information may be used for indoor identification.
  • the indoor identification unit 420 determines whether or not the wireless communication unit 110 has received the power-on information in step s81 within a predetermined period after it is determined YES in step s1. That is, the indoor identifying unit 420 determines whether or not the wireless communication unit 110 has received the power-on information within a predetermined period after the electronic device 10 receives the network name. If the indoor specifying unit 420 determines in step s81 that the wireless communication unit 110 has received the power-on information, it executes step s3 and determines “indoor”.
  • the indoor identification related process ends.
  • the smart home appliances such as a television, a game machine, and an air conditioner that are present in the building may be turned on.
  • the electronic device 10 can more accurately specify that the user 9 is present indoors by determining “indoor” when receiving the power-on information from the smart home appliance after determining YES in step s2. it can.
  • the home appliance door opening information may be used for indoor identification.
  • the indoor identifying unit 420 determines whether or not the wireless communication unit 110 has received the home appliance door opening information within a predetermined period after it is determined YES in step s1 in step s81.
  • the indoor specifying unit 420 determines in step s81 that the wireless communication unit 110 has received the home appliance door opening information
  • the indoor specifying unit 420 executes step s3 and determines “indoor”.
  • an indoor specific related process will be complete
  • the door of a smart home appliance having a door such as a refrigerator, a microwave oven, and an oven toaster, existing in the building may be opened. More accurately specifying that the user 9 is present indoors by determining “indoor” when the electronic device 10 receives home appliance door opening information from the smart home appliance after determining YES in step s2. Can do.
  • smart home appliances include smart home appliances having a human sensor that detects a person around the smart home appliance.
  • the indoor identification unit 420 detects, from the smart home appliance, the wireless communication unit 110 within a predetermined period of time after detecting YES in step s1 that the human sensor it has detected a person. It may be determined whether or not is received. If the indoor specifying unit 420 determines in step s81 that the wireless communication unit 110 has received the detection information, the indoor specifying unit 420 executes step s3 and determines “indoor”. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s81 that the wireless communication unit 110 does not receive the detection information, the indoor identification related process ends. As described above, when the electronic device 10 determines “indoor” when receiving the detection information from the smart home appliance after determining “YES” in step s2, the user 9 is more correctly identified as being indoors. can do.
  • human sensors for example, optical sensors using visible light or infrared rays, microwave radar, millimeter wave radar, image sensors for cameras, odor sensors for detecting odor components in the atmosphere, or microphones for detecting sound Etc. may be adopted. Based on the value detected by the human sensor, the smart home appliance can recognize that there is a person around the smart home appliance.
  • the indoor identifying unit 420 determines whether or not the wireless communication unit 110 has received the lighting information within a predetermined period of time after determining YES in step s1 in step s81. If the indoor specifying unit 420 determines in step s81 that the wireless communication unit 110 has received the lighting information, the indoor specifying unit 420 executes step s3 and determines “indoor”. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s81 that the wireless communication unit 110 does not receive the lighting information, the indoor identification related process ends.
  • step s81 may be referred to as a “home appliance related determination process”.
  • the electronic device 10 determines whether or not the door of the building has been unlocked, and performs indoor identification based on the determination result and the determination result in the identification information determination unit 500. This example will be described in detail below.
  • FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of indoor identification related processing according to this example. As shown in FIG. 23, the control unit 100 executes the above-described steps s1 and s2. If it is determined YES in step s2, control unit 100 determines in step s91 whether the door of the building has been unlocked within a predetermined time after determining YES in step 1.
  • the building is provided with a key opening / closing sensor for detecting the opening / closing of the key of the door.
  • the key opening / closing sensor can transmit key opening information indicating the door.
  • the key opening / closing sensor can transmit key closing information indicating that the door key is closed.
  • the control unit 100 determines the building information within the predetermined time after determining YES in step s1. It is determined that the door is unlocked. On the other hand, if the wireless communication unit 110 has not received the key opening information within a predetermined time after determining YES in step s1, the control unit 100 determines a predetermined time after determining YES in step s1. It is determined that the building door was not unlocked inside.
  • step s91 If it is determined in step s91 that the door of the building has not been unlocked, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s91 that the building door has been unlocked, step s3 is executed and it is determined that the user 9 is present indoors. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
  • the indoor identification unit 420 performs indoor identification based on the determination result of the identification information determination unit 500 and the determination result of whether or not the door of the building has been unlocked.
  • the user 9 can be identified more accurately indoors.
  • the processing in step s91 may be referred to as “key opening determination processing”.
  • step s92 the control unit 100 determines whether or not the door of the building has been locked within a predetermined time after determining YES in step s91. May be.
  • step s92 when the wireless communication unit 110 receives the key closing information within a predetermined time after the determination of YES in step s91, the control unit 100 determines the building information within the predetermined time after determining YES in step s91. It is determined that the door is locked.
  • the control unit 100 determines a predetermined time after determining YES in step s91. It is determined that the building door has not been locked inside.
  • step s92 If it is determined in step s92 that the door of the building has not been closed, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s92 that the door of the building has been closed, step s3 is executed and it is determined that the user 9 is present indoors. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
  • step s92 the processing composed of steps s91 and s92 may be referred to as “key opening / closing determination processing”.
  • the indoor identification unit 420 may use the result of the determination as to whether or not the building door has been opened instead of the result of the determination as to whether or not the building door has been unlocked.
  • FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the indoor identification related process in this case.
  • step s2 when it is determined as YES in step s2, the control unit 100 determines whether or not the building door is opened within a predetermined time after it is determined as YES in step 1 in step s101. judge.
  • the building is provided with a door opening / closing sensor for detecting opening / closing of the door.
  • the door opening / closing sensor can transmit door opening information indicating the door.
  • the door opening / closing sensor can transmit door closing information indicating that the door is closed.
  • the control unit 100 determines the building opening within the predetermined time after it is determined as YES in step s1. It is determined that the door has been opened. On the other hand, if the wireless communication unit 110 does not receive the door opening information within a predetermined time after determining YES in step s1, the control unit 100 determines a predetermined time after determining YES in step s1. It is determined that the building door was not opened inside.
  • step s101 If it is determined in step s101 that the door of the building has not been opened, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s101 that the building door has been opened, step s3 is executed, and it is determined that the user 9 is present indoors. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
  • step s101 may be referred to as “door open determination processing”.
  • the control unit 100 determines whether or not the door of the building is closed within a predetermined time after determining YES in step s101 in step s102 after step s101. Good.
  • step s102 when the wireless communication unit 110 receives the door closing information within a predetermined time after determining YES in step s101, the control unit 100 determines that the building is closed within the predetermined time after determining YES in step s91. It is determined that the door is closed.
  • the control unit 100 determines a predetermined time after determining YES in step s101. It is determined that the building door was never closed.
  • step s102 If it is determined in step s102 that the building door has not been closed, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s102 that the building door is closed, step s3 is executed and it is determined that the user 9 is present indoors. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
  • step s102 by executing step s102 after step s101, it is possible to more correctly specify that the user 9 is present indoors.
  • the process composed of steps s101 and s102 may be referred to as “door opening / closing determination process”.
  • the electronic device 10 compares the temperature of the electronic device 10 with the temperature in the building, and performs indoor identification based on the comparison result and the determination result in the identification information determination unit 500. .
  • This example will be described in detail below.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the electronic device 10 according to the present example.
  • the electronic device 10 according to this example further includes a temperature sensor 250 in the electronic device 10 shown in FIG. 4 described above.
  • the temperature sensor 250 is located, for example, in the device case 11.
  • the temperature sensor 250 can detect the temperature of the electronic device 10.
  • an in-building temperature sensor capable of detecting the temperature in the building is provided in a building such as a home.
  • the in-building temperature sensor can transmit the temperature in the building detected by itself.
  • the building temperature sensor may be provided in a smart home appliance such as an air conditioner.
  • the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 250 of the electronic device 10 may be referred to as a “first temperature”.
  • the temperature detected by the building temperature sensor may be referred to as a “second temperature”.
  • FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of indoor identification related processing according to this example.
  • the control unit 100 executes the above-described steps s1 and s2. If YES is determined in step s2, control unit 100 determines in step s111 whether wireless communication unit 110 receives the second temperature within a predetermined time after YES is determined in step s1.
  • step s111 If it is determined in step s111 that the second temperature is not received by the wireless communication unit 110, the indoor identification related process ends.
  • the control unit 100 detects the first temperature detected by the temperature sensor 250 and the second temperature received by the wireless communication unit 110. Are determined to be close to each other.
  • the control unit 100 first obtains an absolute value of a value obtained by subtracting the second temperature from the first temperature. And the control part 100 determines with the 1st and 2nd temperature being a mutually close value, when the calculated
  • the control unit 100 determines that the first and second temperatures are separated from each other.
  • the controller 100 determines that the first and second temperatures are close to each other when the obtained absolute value is less than the threshold value, and when the obtained absolute value is equal to or greater than the threshold value, It may be determined that the first and second temperatures are separated from each other.
  • step s112 If it is determined in step s112 that the first and second temperatures are separated from each other, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first and second temperatures are close to each other, step s3 is executed and it is determined that the user 9 is present indoors. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
  • the indoor identification unit 420 performs indoor identification based on the determination result in the identification information determination unit 500 and the comparison result between the first and second temperatures, the user 9 exists indoors. Can be specified more correctly.
  • the process composed of steps s111 and s112 may be referred to as “temperature determination process”.
  • the electronic device 10 may compare the humidity around the electronic device 10 with the humidity in the building, and may perform indoor identification based on the comparison result and the determination result in the identification information determination unit 500.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the electronic device 10 in this case.
  • FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the indoor identification related process in this case.
  • the electronic device 10 shown in FIG. 29 includes a humidity sensor 260 that detects the humidity around the electronic device 10.
  • an in-building humidity sensor capable of detecting the humidity in the building is provided in a building such as a home.
  • the in-building humidity sensor can transmit the humidity in the building detected by itself.
  • the in-building humidity sensor may be provided in a smart home appliance such as an air conditioner or a humidifier.
  • first humidity the temperature detected by the humidity sensor 260 of the electronic device 10
  • second humidity the temperature detected by the in-building humidity sensor
  • control unit 100 executes the above-described steps s1 and s2. If YES is determined in step s2, control unit 100 determines in step s121 whether or not wireless communication unit 110 receives the second humidity within a predetermined time after determining YES in step s1.
  • step s121 If it is determined in step s121 that the second humidity is not received by the wireless communication unit 110, the indoor identification related process ends.
  • step s122 the control unit 100 detects the first humidity detected by the humidity sensor 260 and the second humidity received by the wireless communication unit 110. Are determined to be close to each other.
  • step s122 the control unit 100 first obtains an absolute value of a value obtained by subtracting the second humidity from the first humidity. And the control part 100 determines with the 1st and 2nd humidity being a mutually close value, when the calculated
  • control unit 100 determines that the first and second humidity are separated from each other when the obtained absolute value is larger than the threshold value.
  • the control unit 100 determines that the first and second humidity values are close to each other when the obtained absolute value is less than the threshold value, and if the obtained absolute value is equal to or greater than the threshold value, It may be determined that the first and second humidity are separated from each other.
  • step s122 If it is determined in step s122 that the first and second humidity are separated from each other, the indoor identification related process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first and second humidity values are close to each other, step s3 is executed and it is determined that the user 9 is present indoors. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
  • the indoor identification unit 420 performs indoor identification based on the determination result of the identification information determination unit 500 and the comparison result of the first and second humidity, the user 9 is present indoors. Can be specified more correctly.
  • the process composed of steps s121 and s122 may be referred to as “humidity determination process”.
  • the network name transmitted by the access point in the home of the child 9 is registered in the storage unit 103 of the electronic device 10 as the registered network name.
  • the electronic device 10 determines “indoor”, that is, when it is determined that the child 9 is present at home, the electronic device 10 notifies the registered device registered in the electronic device 10 that the child 9 has returned home. .
  • the storage unit 103 of the electronic device 10 stores e-mail addresses assigned to registered devices, for example.
  • the wireless communication unit 110 notifies the registered device that the child 9 has returned using the email address in the storage unit 103. Send notification information.
  • Examples of the registered device include a mobile phone held by the parents of the child 9 or a mobile phone held by the grandparents of the child 9. A plurality of registered devices may be registered in the electronic device 10.
  • the electronic device 10 determines “indoor”, the child 9 has returned home even if the parent of the child 9 is not at home by notifying the outside of the electronic device 10. Can know. Therefore, the convenience of the electronic device 10 is improved. Even when the user 9 is not a child, the electronic device 10 may notify the outside of the electronic device 10 when it is determined to be “indoor”.
  • the operation mode of the electronic device 10 includes a manner mode in which the electronic device 10 does not output sound. If the child 9 is present at home and the operation mode of the electronic device 10 is set to the manner mode, the child 9 may not be aware of the communication to the electronic device 10 from the cellular phone such as the parent. .
  • the network name transmitted by the access point in the home of the child 9 is registered in the storage unit 103 of the electronic device 10 as the registered network name.
  • the operation mode of the electronic device 10 is set to the manner mode, if the indoor identifying unit 420 determines “indoor”, the electronic device 10 cancels the manner mode.
  • the electronic device 10 is more likely to be released from the manner mode. Therefore, the possibility that the child 9 at home notices contact (for example, contact by voice call or e-mail) from the parent mobile phone to the electronic device 10 is improved. Therefore, the convenience of the electronic device 10 is improved.
  • step s61 and step s62 the stop determination process (step s61 and step s62), the charge determination process (step s71), the home appliance related determination process (step s81), the key Open determination process (step s91), key open / close determination process (step s91 and step s92), door open determination process (step s101), door open / close determination process (step s101 and step s102), temperature determination process (step s111 and step s112) ) And humidity determination processing (steps s121 and s122).
  • At least two determination processes of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process may be performed after determining YES in step s2.
  • At least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process may be executed. In this case, for example, at least one process is executed after YES is determined in step s41.
  • at least one of stop determination processing, charge determination processing, home appliance related determination processing, temperature determination processing, and humidity determination processing, key opening determination processing, key opening / closing determination processing, door opening determination processing, and door Any one of the open / close determination processes may be executed.
  • step s41 after determining YES in step s41, at least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance-related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process, a key opening determination process, and a key
  • a stop determination process at least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance-related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process, a key opening determination process, and a key
  • At least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process may be executed. In this case, for example, at least one process is executed after YES is determined in step s52.
  • at least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance-related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process, a key opening determination process, a key opening / closing determination process, a door opening determination process, and a door Any one of the open / close determination processes may be executed.
  • step s52 at least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance-related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process, a key opening determination process, and a key
  • a stop determination process at least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance-related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process, a key opening determination process, and a key
  • At least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process may be executed. In this case, for example, at least one process is executed after YES is determined in step s41.
  • at least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance-related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process, a key opening determination process, a key opening / closing determination process, a door opening determination process, and a door Any one of the open / close determination processes may be executed.
  • step s41 after determining YES in step s41, at least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance-related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process, a key opening determination process, and a key
  • a stop determination process at least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance-related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process, a key opening determination process, and a key
  • FIG. 31 is a flowchart of FIG. 19 illustrating the indoor identification related process when the stop determination process, the charge determination process, the home appliance related determination process, the temperature determination process, the humidity determination process, and the key opening determination process are executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example. Steps s1, s51, s2, s52, and s41 in FIG. 19 are executed. If YES is determined in step s41, the control unit 100 performs a stop determination process (steps s61 and s62) in step s201. Execute. If it is determined YES in step s62 of the stop determination process, step s3 is executed. When step s3 is executed, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, if NO is determined in step s62, the control unit 100 performs a key opening determination process (step s91) in step s202.
  • step s3 is executed. On the other hand, if NO is determined in step s91, the control unit 100 performs a temperature determination process (steps s111 and s112) in step s203. If it is determined YES in both step s111 and step s112 of the temperature determination process, step s3 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined NO in either step s111 or step s112 of the temperature determination process, the control unit 100 performs a humidity determination process (step s121 and step s122) in step s204.
  • step s3 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined NO in any of steps s121 and s122 of the humidity determination process, the control unit 100 performs a charge determination process (step s71) in step s205. If it is determined YES in step s71 of the charging determination process, step s3 is executed. On the other hand, if it determines with NO in step s71, the control part 100 will perform household appliance related determination processing (step s81) in step s206. If it is determined YES in step s81 of the home appliance related determination process, step s3 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined as NO in step s81, the indoor identification related process ends.
  • steps s201 to s206 are not limited to the above. Further, at least one process of steps s201 to s206 may not be executed.
  • step s202 a key opening / closing determination process may be executed. In this case, if YES is determined in both step s91 and step s92 of the key opening / closing determination process, step s3 is executed. On the other hand, if NO is determined in either step s91 or step s92, step s203 is executed.
  • step s202 a door open determination process may be executed. In this case, if YES is determined in step s101 of the door open determination process, step s3 is executed.
  • step s203 is executed.
  • step s202 a door open determination process may be executed.
  • step s3 is executed.
  • step s203 is executed.
  • the indoor identification is performed using the network name in the wireless LAN.
  • the wireless communication unit 110 transmits identification information assigned to the communication device and capable of changing its contents
  • Indoor identification can be similarly performed using the identification information instead of the network name.
  • the network name in the wireless LAN is used to identify indoors, but the BSSID may be used instead of the network name. Even in this case, it is possible to appropriately specify that the user 9 exists indoors.
  • the electronic device 10 is a mobile phone such as a smartphone, but may be another type of electronic device.
  • the electronic device 10 may be a tablet terminal, a personal computer, a wearable device, or the like, for example.
  • the wearable device employed as the electronic device 10 may be a wristband type or wristwatch type that is worn on the arm, or a headband type or glasses type that is worn on the head. It may also be a type that is worn on the body, such as a clothing type.
  • the electronic device 10 has been described in detail, but the above description is an example in all aspects, and the disclosure is not limited thereto.
  • the various examples described above can be applied in combination as long as they do not contradict each other. And it is understood that countless examples not illustrated can be assumed without departing from the scope of this disclosure.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Radar, Positioning & Navigation (AREA)
  • Remote Sensing (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Automation & Control Theory (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Telephone Function (AREA)

Abstract

This electronic device is provided with a communication unit which performs radio communication, a storage unit, a first determination unit and an indoors specification unit. As registered identification information, the storage unit stores modifiable identification information assigned to a first communication device with which the communication unit can communicate wirelessly. The first determination unit determines whether or not registered identification information coincides with received identification information assigned to said second communication device and received by the communication unit from a second communication device. The indoors specification unit performs indoors specification for specifying whether a user of the electronic device is indoors on the basis of the first determination result of the first determination unit.

Description

電子機器、制御装置、制御プログラム及び電子機器の動作方法Electronic device, control device, control program, and operation method of electronic device 関連出願の相互参照Cross-reference of related applications
 本出願は、日本国出願2016-229120号(2016年11月25日出願)と日本国出願2017-058103号(2017年3月23日出願)との優先権を主張するものであり、当該出願の開示全体を、ここに参照のために取り込む。 This application claims priority between the Japanese application 2016-229120 (filed on November 25, 2016) and the Japanese application 2017-058103 (filed on March 23, 2017). The entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
 本開示は、電子機器に関する。 This disclosure relates to electronic equipment.
 電子機器に関して様々な技術が提案されている。 Various technologies have been proposed for electronic devices.
 電子機器、制御装置、制御プログラム及び電子機器の動作方法が開示される。一の実施の形態では、電子機器は、無線通信を行う通信部と、記憶部と、第1判定部と、屋内特定部とを備える。記憶部は、通信部が無線通信することが可能な第1通信装置に割り当てられた、その内容を変更することが可能な識別情報を登録識別情報として記憶する。第1判定部は、通信部が第2通信装置から受信する、当該第2通信装置に割り当てられた識別情報である受信識別情報と、登録識別情報とが一致するか否かを判定する。屋内特定部は、第1判定部での第1判定結果に基づいて、電子機器のユーザが屋内に存在することを特定する屋内特定を行う。 An electronic device, a control device, a control program, and an electronic device operation method are disclosed. In one embodiment, an electronic device includes a communication unit that performs wireless communication, a storage unit, a first determination unit, and an indoor identification unit. The storage unit stores, as registered identification information, identification information that is assigned to the first communication device capable of wireless communication by the communication unit and whose contents can be changed. The first determination unit determines whether the reception identification information, which is the identification information assigned to the second communication device, received by the communication unit from the second communication device matches the registered identification information. The indoor identification unit performs indoor identification that identifies that the user of the electronic device is present indoors based on the first determination result in the first determination unit.
 また、一の実施の形態では、制御装置は、無線通信を行う電子機器が備える、当該電子機器の動作を制御する制御装置である。制御装置は判定部及び屋内特定部を備える。判定部は、電子機器に登録された、当該電子機器が無線通信を行うことが可能な第1通信装置に割り当てられた、その内容を変更することが可能な識別情報である登録識別情報と、電子機器が無線通信で第2通信装置から受信する、当該第2通信装置に割り当てられた識別情報である受信識別情報とが一致するか否かを判定する、屋内特定部は、判定部での判定結果に基づいて、電子機器のユーザが屋内に存在することを特定する屋内特定を行う。 In one embodiment, the control device is a control device that controls the operation of the electronic device provided in the electronic device that performs wireless communication. The control device includes a determination unit and an indoor identification unit. The determination unit is registered identification information that is registered in an electronic device and is assigned to a first communication device that can perform wireless communication with the electronic device, and is identification information that can change the contents thereof. The indoor specifying unit that determines whether or not the reception identification information that is the identification information assigned to the second communication device that the electronic device receives from the second communication device via wireless communication matches the determination unit Based on the determination result, indoor identification is performed to identify that the user of the electronic device exists indoors.
 また、一の実施の形態では、制御プログラムは、無線通信を行う電子機器を制御するための制御プログラムであって、当該電子機器に第1及び第2工程を実行させるためのものである。第1工程では、電子機器に登録された、当該電子機器が無線通信を行うことが可能な第1通信装置に割り当てられた、その内容を変更することが可能な識別情報である登録識別情報と、電子機器が無線通信で第2通信装置から受信する、当該第2通信装置に割り当てられた識別情報である受信識別情報とが一致するか否かが判定される。第2工程では、第1工程での判定結果に基づいて、電子機器のユーザが屋内に存在することを特定する屋内特定が行われる。 In one embodiment, the control program is a control program for controlling an electronic device that performs wireless communication, and is for causing the electronic device to execute the first and second steps. In the first step, registered identification information that is registered in an electronic device and is assigned to a first communication device capable of performing wireless communication by the electronic device, and is identification information that can be changed. It is determined whether or not the reception identification information, which is the identification information assigned to the second communication device, received by the electronic device from the second communication device by wireless communication matches. In the second step, indoor identification that specifies that the user of the electronic device is present indoors is performed based on the determination result in the first step.
 また、一の実施の形態では、電子機器の動作方法は、無線通信を行う電子機器の動作方法であって、第1及び第2工程を備える。第1工程では、電子機器に登録された、当該電子機器が無線通信を行うことが可能な第1通信装置に割り当てられた、その内容を変更することが可能な識別情報である登録識別情報と、電子機器が無線通信で第2通信装置から受信する、当該第2通信装置に割り当てられた識別情報である受信識別情報とが一致するか否かが判定される。第2工程では、第1工程での判定結果に基づいて、電子機器のユーザが屋内に存在することを特定する屋内特定が行われる。 In one embodiment, the operation method of the electronic device is an operation method of the electronic device that performs wireless communication, and includes first and second steps. In the first step, registered identification information that is registered in an electronic device and is assigned to a first communication device capable of performing wireless communication by the electronic device, and is identification information that can be changed. It is determined whether or not the reception identification information, which is the identification information assigned to the second communication device, received by the electronic device from the second communication device by wireless communication matches. In the second step, indoor identification that specifies that the user of the electronic device is present indoors is performed based on the determination result in the first step.
電子機器が使用されるシステムの一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the system in which an electronic device is used. 電子機器の外観の一例を示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows an example of the external appearance of an electronic device. 電子機器の外観の一例を示す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows an example of the external appearance of an electronic device. 電子機器の構成の一例を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of an electronic device. 制御部の構成の一例を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of a control part. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器のユーザが屋内に存在する様子の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that the user of an electronic device exists indoors. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器のユーザが屋外に存在する様子の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of a mode that the user of an electronic device exists outdoors. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の構成の一例を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の構成の一例を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device. 電子機器の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of operation | movement of an electronic device.
 図1は、電子機器10が使用されるシステムの一例を示す図である。電子機器10は、例えば、スマートフォン等の携帯電話機である。電子機器10は、例えば、高度道路交通システム(ITS:Intelligent Transport Systems)で使用されることが可能である。具体的には、電子機器10は、ITSの安全運転支援通信システム1で使用されることが可能である。安全運転支援通信システム1は、安全運転支援システムと呼ばれたり、安全運転支援無線システムと呼ばれたりする。 FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a system in which the electronic device 10 is used. The electronic device 10 is a mobile phone such as a smartphone, for example. The electronic device 10 can be used in, for example, an intelligent road transport system (ITS). Specifically, the electronic device 10 can be used in an ITS safe driving support communication system 1. The safe driving support communication system 1 is called a safe driving support system or a safe driving support wireless system.
 図1に示されるように、安全運転支援通信システム1では、交差点2等に配置されている路側機5と、車道7を走る自動車等の車両6と、歩行者であるユーザ9が持つ電子機器10とが、互いに無線通信を行うことが可能である。これにより、路側機5、車両6及び電子機器10は、互いに情報をやり取りすることが可能である。また、複数の車両6は、互いに無線通信を行うことが可能である。これにより、複数の車両6は、互いに情報をやり取りすることが可能である。路側機5と車両6との間の通信、車両6間の通信、路側機5と歩行者の電子機器10との間の通信、歩行者の電子機器10と車両6の間の通信は、それぞれ、路車間通信、車車間通信、路歩間通信、歩車間通信と呼ばれる。 As shown in FIG. 1, in the safe driving support communication system 1, a roadside device 5 disposed at an intersection 2 or the like, a vehicle 6 such as an automobile running on a roadway 7, and an electronic device held by a user 9 who is a pedestrian 10 can communicate with each other wirelessly. Thereby, the roadside machine 5, the vehicle 6, and the electronic device 10 can exchange information with each other. The plurality of vehicles 6 can perform wireless communication with each other. Thereby, the plurality of vehicles 6 can exchange information with each other. Communication between roadside machine 5 and vehicle 6, communication between vehicles 6, communication between roadside machine 5 and pedestrian electronic device 10, communication between pedestrian electronic device 10 and vehicle 6, respectively Road-to-vehicle communication, vehicle-to-vehicle communication, road-to-vehicle communication, and vehicle-to-vehicle communication.
 路側機5は、例えば、信号機4の点灯に関する情報及び道路規制に関する情報などを車両6及び電子機器10に通知することが可能である。また、路側機5は、その近くの車両6及び歩行者を検知することが可能である。交差点2に配置された路側機5は、例えば、横断歩道3を渡る歩行者を検知することが可能である。そして、路側機5は、検知した車両6及び歩行者に関する情報を、車両6及び電子機器10に通知することが可能である。また、路側機5は、車両6及び電子機器10から通知される情報を、他の車両6及び電子機器10に通知することが可能である。 The roadside device 5 can notify the vehicle 6 and the electronic device 10 of information regarding lighting of the traffic light 4 and information regarding road regulations, for example. Moreover, the roadside machine 5 can detect the nearby vehicle 6 and a pedestrian. The roadside machine 5 arranged at the intersection 2 can detect a pedestrian crossing the pedestrian crossing 3, for example. And the roadside machine 5 can notify the information regarding the detected vehicle 6 and the pedestrian to the vehicle 6 and the electronic device 10. Further, the roadside machine 5 can notify the other vehicle 6 and the electronic device 10 of information notified from the vehicle 6 and the electronic device 10.
 車両6は、自身のウィンカーに関する情報、自身の位置及び自身の速度などを、他の車両6、路側機5及び電子機器10に対して通知することが可能である。そして、車両6は、通知される情報に基づいて警告等の各種通知を運転者に行うことによって、運転者の安全運転を支援することが可能である。車両6は、スピーカ及び表示装置等を利用して、運転者に各種通知を行うことが可能である。車両6は、例えば、当該車両6に搭載されているカーナビゲーション装置を利用して、運転者に各種通知を行うことが可能である。 The vehicle 6 can notify the other vehicle 6, the roadside machine 5, and the electronic device 10 of information related to its own blinker, its own position, its own speed, and the like. And the vehicle 6 can assist a driver | operator's safe driving by giving a driver | operator various notifications, such as warning, based on the notified information. The vehicle 6 can make various notifications to the driver using a speaker, a display device, and the like. For example, the vehicle 6 can make various notifications to the driver by using a car navigation device mounted on the vehicle 6.
 電子機器10は、そのユーザ9の状態を特定することが可能である。電子機器10は、特定したユーザ9の状態に関する情報などを路側機5等に通知することが可能である。電子機器10の動作については後で詳細に説明する。 The electronic device 10 can specify the state of the user 9. The electronic device 10 can notify the roadside machine 5 and the like of information relating to the identified state of the user 9. The operation of the electronic device 10 will be described later in detail.
 このように、安全運転支援通信システム1では、路車間通信、車車間通信、路歩間通信及び歩車間通信が行われることによって、車両6の運転者の安全運転が支援される。 As described above, the safe driving support communication system 1 supports the safe driving of the driver of the vehicle 6 by performing road-to-vehicle communication, vehicle-to-vehicle communication, road-to-step communication, and vehicle-to-vehicle communication.
 なお図1の例では、車両6として、自動車の車両が示されているが、車両6は、自動車以外の車両であってもよい。例えば、車両6は、バスの車両であってもよいし、路面電車の車両であってもよい。また電子機器10は、安全運転支援通信システム1以外のシステムにおいても使用することが可能である。 In the example of FIG. 1, an automobile vehicle is shown as the vehicle 6, but the vehicle 6 may be a vehicle other than an automobile. For example, the vehicle 6 may be a bus vehicle or a tram vehicle. The electronic device 10 can also be used in a system other than the safe driving support communication system 1.
 <電子機器の外観の一例>
 図2及び3は電子機器10の外観の一例を示す斜視図及び背面図である。図1及び2に示されるように、電子機器10は、平面視で略長方形の板状の機器ケース11を備えている。機器ケース11は電子機器10の外装を構成している。
<Example of external appearance of electronic device>
2 and 3 are a perspective view and a rear view showing an example of the appearance of the electronic device 10. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the electronic device 10 includes a plate-like device case 11 that is substantially rectangular in plan view. The device case 11 constitutes the exterior of the electronic device 10.
 機器ケース11の前面11aには、文字、記号、図形等の各種情報が表示される表示領域12が位置している。表示領域12の背面側には後述するタッチパネル130が位置している。これにより、ユーザ9は、電子機器10の前面の表示領域12を指等で操作することによって、電子機器10に対して各種情報を入力することができる。なお、ユーザ9は、指以外の操作子、例えば、スタイラスペンなどのタッチパネル用ペンで表示領域12を操作することによっても、電子機器10に対して各種情報を入力することができる。 On the front surface 11a of the device case 11, a display area 12 for displaying various information such as characters, symbols, figures and the like is located. A touch panel 130 described later is located on the back side of the display area 12. Accordingly, the user 9 can input various information to the electronic device 10 by operating the display area 12 on the front surface of the electronic device 10 with a finger or the like. Note that the user 9 can also input various types of information to the electronic device 10 by operating the display area 12 with an operator other than a finger, for example, a touch panel pen such as a stylus pen.
 機器ケース11の前面11aの上端部にはレシーバ穴13が位置している。前面11aの下端部にはスピーカ穴14が位置している。機器ケース11の下側の側面11cにはマイク穴15が位置している。 The receiver hole 13 is located at the upper end of the front surface 11a of the device case 11. A speaker hole 14 is located at the lower end of the front surface 11a. A microphone hole 15 is located on the lower side surface 11 c of the device case 11.
 機器ケース11の前面11aの上端部からは、後述する第1カメラ180が有するレンズ181が視認可能となっている。図3に示されるように、機器ケース11の背面11bの上端部からは、後述する第2カメラ190が有するレンズ191が視認可能となっている。 From the upper end portion of the front surface 11a of the device case 11, a lens 181 included in the first camera 180 described later is visible. As shown in FIG. 3, a lens 191 included in a second camera 190 described later is visible from the upper end portion of the back surface 11 b of the device case 11.
 電子機器10は、複数の操作ボタン22から成る操作ボタン群220(後述の図4参照)を備えている。複数の操作ボタン22のそれぞれは、例えばハードウェアボタンである。具体的には、複数の操作ボタン22のそれぞれは押しボタンである。なお、操作ボタン群220に含まれる少なくとも一つの操作ボタン22は、表示領域12に表示されるソフトウェアボタンであってもよい。 The electronic device 10 includes an operation button group 220 (see FIG. 4 described later) including a plurality of operation buttons 22. Each of the plurality of operation buttons 22 is, for example, a hardware button. Specifically, each of the plurality of operation buttons 22 is a push button. Note that at least one operation button 22 included in the operation button group 220 may be a software button displayed in the display area 12.
 操作ボタン群220には、機器ケース11の前面11aの下端部に位置する操作ボタン22a、操作ボタン22b及び操作ボタン22cが含まれる。また、操作ボタン群220には、機器ケース11の表面に位置する電源ボタン及びボリュームボタンが含まれる。 The operation button group 220 includes an operation button 22a, an operation button 22b, and an operation button 22c located at the lower end of the front surface 11a of the device case 11. The operation button group 220 includes a power button and a volume button located on the surface of the device case 11.
 操作ボタン22aは、例えばバックボタンである。バックボタンは、表示領域12の表示を一つ前の表示に切り替えるための操作ボタンである。ユーザ9が操作ボタン22aを操作することよって、表示領域12の表示が一つ前の表示に切り替わる。操作ボタン22bは、例えばホームボタンである。ホームボタンは、表示領域12にホーム画面を表示させるための操作ボタンである。ユーザ9が操作ボタン22bを操作することよって、表示領域12にホーム画面が表示される。操作ボタン22cは、例えば履歴ボタンである。履歴ボタンは、電子機器10で実行されたアプリケーションの履歴を表示領域12に表示させるための操作ボタンである。ユーザ9が操作ボタン22cを操作することよって、表示領域12には、電子機器10で実行されたアプリケーションの履歴が表示される。 The operation button 22a is, for example, a back button. The back button is an operation button for switching the display in the display area 12 to the previous display. When the user 9 operates the operation button 22a, the display in the display area 12 is switched to the previous display. The operation button 22b is, for example, a home button. The home button is an operation button for displaying a home screen in the display area 12. When the user 9 operates the operation button 22b, the home screen is displayed in the display area 12. The operation button 22c is a history button, for example. The history button is an operation button for causing the display area 12 to display a history of applications executed on the electronic device 10. When the user 9 operates the operation button 22c, a history of applications executed on the electronic device 10 is displayed in the display area 12.
 <電子機器の電気的構成の一例>
 図4は電子機器10の電気的構成の一例を主に示すブロック図である。図4に示されるように、電子機器10は、制御部100、無線通信部110、表示部120、操作部210及び衛星信号受信部140を備える。さらに電子機器10は、レシーバ150、スピーカ160、マイク170、第1カメラ180、第2カメラ190、加速度センサ200及び電池230を備える。電子機器10が備えるこれらの構成要素は、機器ケース11内に収められている。
<Example of electrical configuration of electronic device>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram mainly showing an example of the electrical configuration of the electronic apparatus 10. As shown in FIG. 4, the electronic device 10 includes a control unit 100, a wireless communication unit 110, a display unit 120, an operation unit 210, and a satellite signal reception unit 140. The electronic device 10 further includes a receiver 150, a speaker 160, a microphone 170, a first camera 180, a second camera 190, an acceleration sensor 200, and a battery 230. These components included in the electronic device 10 are housed in a device case 11.
 制御部100は、電子機器10の他の構成要素を制御することによって、電子機器10の動作を統括的に管理することが可能である。制御部100は制御装置とも言える。制御部100は、以下にさらに詳細に述べられるように、種々の機能を実行するための制御及び処理能力を提供するために、少なくとも1つのプロセッサを含む。 The control unit 100 can comprehensively manage the operation of the electronic device 10 by controlling other components of the electronic device 10. The control unit 100 can also be said to be a control device. The controller 100 includes at least one processor to provide control and processing capabilities to perform various functions, as described in further detail below.
 種々の実施形態によれば、少なくとも1つのプロセッサは、単一の集積回路(IC)として、又は複数の通信可能に接続された集積回路IC及び/又はディスクリート回路(discrete circuits)として実行されてもよい。少なくとも1つのプロセッサは、種々の既知の技術に従って実行されることが可能である。 According to various embodiments, the at least one processor may be implemented as a single integrated circuit (IC) or as a plurality of communicatively connected integrated circuits ICs and / or discrete circuits. Good. The at least one processor can be implemented according to various known techniques.
 1つの実施形態において、プロセッサは、例えば、関連するメモリに記憶された指示を実行することによって1以上のデータ計算手続又は処理を実行するように構成された1以上の回路又はユニットを含む。他の実施形態において、プロセッサは、1以上のデータ計算手続き又は処理を実行するように構成されたファームウェア(例えば、ディスクリートロジックコンポーネント)であってもよい。 In one embodiment, the processor includes one or more circuits or units configured to perform one or more data computation procedures or processes, for example, by executing instructions stored in associated memory. In other embodiments, the processor may be firmware (eg, a discrete logic component) configured to perform one or more data computation procedures or processes.
 種々の実施形態によれば、プロセッサは、1以上のプロセッサ、コントローラ、マイクロプロセッサ、マイクロコントローラ、特定用途向け集積回路(ASIC)、デジタル信号処理装置、プログラマブルロジックデバイス、フィールドプログラマブルゲートアレイ、又はこれらのデバイス若しくは構成の任意の組み合わせ、又は他の既知のデバイス及び構成の組み合わせを含み、以下に説明される機能を実行してもよい。 According to various embodiments, the processor may include one or more processors, controllers, microprocessors, microcontrollers, application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), digital signal processors, programmable logic devices, field programmable gate arrays, or the like. The functions described below may be performed including any combination of devices or configurations, or other known device and configuration combinations.
 本例では、制御部100は、CPU(Central Processing Unit)101、DSP(Digital Signal Processor)102及び記憶部103を備える。記憶部103は、ROM(Read Only Memory)及びRAM(Random Access Memory)などの、CPU101及びDSP102が読み取り可能な非一時的な記録媒体を含む。記憶部103が有するROMは、例えば、不揮発性メモリであるフラッシュROM(フラッシュメモリ)である。記憶部103には、電子機器10を制御するための複数の制御プログラム103a等が記憶されている。制御部100の各種機能は、CPU101及びDSP102が記憶部103内の各種制御プログラム103aを実行することによって実現される。 In this example, the control unit 100 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 101, a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 102, and a storage unit 103. The storage unit 103 includes a non-transitory recording medium that can be read by the CPU 101 and the DSP 102, such as a ROM (Read Only Memory) and a RAM (Random Access Memory). The ROM included in the storage unit 103 is, for example, a flash ROM (flash memory) that is a nonvolatile memory. The storage unit 103 stores a plurality of control programs 103 a for controlling the electronic device 10. Various functions of the control unit 100 are realized by the CPU 101 and the DSP 102 executing various control programs 103 a in the storage unit 103.
 なお、制御部100の構成は図4の例に限られない。例えば、制御部100は、複数のCPU101を備えてもよい。この場合、制御部100は、比較的複雑は処理を行うメインCPUと、比較的簡単な処理を行うサブCPUとを備えてもよい。また制御部100は、DSP102を備えなくてもよいし、複数のDSP102を備えてもよい。また、制御部100の全ての機能あるいは制御部100の一部の機能は、その機能の実現にソフトウェアが不要なハードウェア回路によって実現されてもよい。 The configuration of the control unit 100 is not limited to the example of FIG. For example, the control unit 100 may include a plurality of CPUs 101. In this case, the control unit 100 may include a main CPU that performs relatively complicated processing and a sub CPU that performs relatively simple processing. Further, the control unit 100 may not include the DSP 102 or may include a plurality of DSPs 102. Further, all the functions of the control unit 100 or a part of the functions of the control unit 100 may be realized by a hardware circuit that does not require software to realize the function.
 記憶部103は、ROM及びRAM以外の、コンピュータが読み取り可能な非一時的な記録媒体を備えていてもよい。記憶部103は、例えば、小型のハードディスクドライブ及びSSD(Solid State Drive)などを備えていてもよい。 The storage unit 103 may include a computer-readable non-transitory recording medium other than the ROM and RAM. The storage unit 103 may include, for example, a small hard disk drive and an SSD (Solid State Drive).
 記憶部103内の複数の制御プログラム103aには、様々なアプリケーション(アプリケーションプログラム)が含まれている。記憶部103には、例えば、音声通話及びビデオ通話を行うための通話アプリケーション、ウェブサイトを表示するためのブラウザ、電子メールの作成、閲覧及び送受信を行うためのメールアプリケーションが記憶されている。また記憶部103には、第1カメラ180及び第2カメラ190を利用して被写体を撮影するためのカメラアプリケーション、記憶部103に記録されている静止画及び動画を表示するための記録画像表示アプリケーション、記憶部103に記憶されている音楽データの再生制御を行うための音楽再生制御アプリケーションなどが記憶されている。記憶部103内の少なくとも一つのアプリケーションは、記憶部103内にあらかじめ記憶されているものであってよい。また、記憶部103内の少なくとも一つのアプリケーションは、電子機器10が他の装置からダウンロードして記憶部103内に記憶したものであってよい。 The plurality of control programs 103a in the storage unit 103 include various applications (application programs). The storage unit 103 stores, for example, a call application for making a voice call and a video call, a browser for displaying a website, and a mail application for creating, browsing, and transmitting / receiving an e-mail. The storage unit 103 also has a camera application for photographing a subject using the first camera 180 and the second camera 190, and a recorded image display application for displaying still images and moving images recorded in the storage unit 103. In addition, a music reproduction control application for performing reproduction control of music data stored in the storage unit 103 is stored. At least one application in the storage unit 103 may be stored in the storage unit 103 in advance. Further, at least one application in the storage unit 103 may be one that the electronic device 10 has downloaded from another device and stored in the storage unit 103.
 無線通信部110は、アンテナ111を有している。無線通信部110は、アンテナ111を用いて、例えば複数種類の通信方式で無線通信することが可能である。無線通信部110の無線通信は、制御部100によって制御される。 The wireless communication unit 110 has an antenna 111. The wireless communication unit 110 can use the antenna 111 to perform wireless communication using a plurality of types of communication methods, for example. Wireless communication of the wireless communication unit 110 is controlled by the control unit 100.
 無線通信部110は、携帯電話システムの基地局と無線通信することが可能である。無線通信部110は、当該基地局及びインターネット等のネットワークを通じて、電子機器10とは別の携帯電話機及びウェブサーバ等と通信することが可能である。電子機器10は、他の携帯電話機等と、データ通信、音声通話及びビデオ通話等を行うことが可能である。 The wireless communication unit 110 can wirelessly communicate with a base station of a mobile phone system. The wireless communication unit 110 can communicate with a mobile phone and a web server other than the electronic device 10 through a network such as the base station and the Internet. The electronic device 10 can perform data communication, voice call, video call, and the like with another mobile phone or the like.
 また無線通信部110は、路側機5及び車両6と無線通信することが可能である。また、無線通信部110は、Wifi等の無線LAN(Local Area Network)を用いて無線通信を行うことが可能である。また無線通信部110は、近距離無線通信を行うことが可能である。例えば、無線通信部110は、Bluetooth(登録商標)に準拠して無線通信することが可能である。無線通信部110は、ZigBee(登録商標)及びNFC(Near Field Communication)の少なくとも一方に準拠して無線通信することが可能であってもよい。 The wireless communication unit 110 can wirelessly communicate with the roadside machine 5 and the vehicle 6. In addition, the wireless communication unit 110 can perform wireless communication using a wireless LAN (Local Area Network) such as WiFi. The wireless communication unit 110 can perform short-range wireless communication. For example, the wireless communication unit 110 can perform wireless communication in conformity with Bluetooth (registered trademark). The wireless communication unit 110 may be capable of performing wireless communication in accordance with at least one of ZigBee (registered trademark) and NFC (Near Field Communication).
 無線通信部110は、アンテナ111で受信した信号に対して増幅処理等の各種処理を行い、処理後の受信信号を制御部100に出力する。制御部100は、入力される受信信号に対して各種処理を行って、当該受信信号に含まれる情報を取得する。また、制御部100は、情報を含む送信信号を無線通信部110に出力する。無線通信部110は、入力される送信信号に対して増幅処理等の各種処理を行って、処理後の送信信号をアンテナ111から無線送信する。 The wireless communication unit 110 performs various processing such as amplification processing on the signal received by the antenna 111 and outputs the processed received signal to the control unit 100. The control unit 100 performs various processes on the input received signal and acquires information included in the received signal. In addition, the control unit 100 outputs a transmission signal including information to the wireless communication unit 110. The wireless communication unit 110 performs various processing such as amplification processing on the input transmission signal, and wirelessly transmits the processed transmission signal from the antenna 111.
 表示部120は、電子機器10の前面に位置する表示領域12と、表示パネル121とを備えている。表示部120は、表示領域12に各種情報を表示することが可能である。表示パネル121は、例えば、液晶表示パネルあるいは有機ELパネルである。表示パネル121は、制御部100によって制御されることによって、文字、記号、図形などの各種情報を表示することが可能である。表示パネル121は、機器ケース11内において、表示領域12と対向している。表示パネル121に表示される情報は表示領域12に表示される。 The display unit 120 includes a display area 12 located on the front surface of the electronic device 10 and a display panel 121. The display unit 120 can display various information in the display area 12. The display panel 121 is, for example, a liquid crystal display panel or an organic EL panel. The display panel 121 can display various types of information such as characters, symbols, and figures by being controlled by the control unit 100. The display panel 121 is opposed to the display area 12 in the device case 11. Information displayed on the display panel 121 is displayed in the display area 12.
 操作部210は、電子機器10に対するユーザ9の各種操作を受け付けることが可能である。操作部210はタッチパネル130及び操作ボタン群220を備える。 The operation unit 210 can accept various operations of the user 9 with respect to the electronic device 10. The operation unit 210 includes a touch panel 130 and an operation button group 220.
 タッチパネル130は、表示領域12に対する指等の操作子による操作を検出することが可能である。タッチパネル130は、例えば、投影型静電容量方式のタッチパネルである。タッチパネル130は、例えば、表示領域12の裏側に位置する。ユーザ9が指等の操作子によって表示領域12に対して操作を行ったとき、その操作に応じた電気信号をタッチパネル130は制御部100に入力することが可能である。制御部100は、タッチパネル130から出力される電気信号に基づいて、表示領域12に対して行われた操作の内容を特定することが可能である。そして制御部100は、特定した操作内容に応じた処理を行うことが可能である。 The touch panel 130 can detect an operation with an operator such as a finger on the display area 12. The touch panel 130 is, for example, a projected capacitive touch panel. The touch panel 130 is located on the back side of the display area 12, for example. When the user 9 operates the display area 12 with an operator such as a finger, the touch panel 130 can input an electric signal corresponding to the operation to the control unit 100. The control unit 100 can specify the content of the operation performed on the display area 12 based on the electrical signal output from the touch panel 130. And the control part 100 can perform the process according to the specified operation content.
 操作ボタン群220の各操作ボタン22は、ユーザ9によって操作されると、操作されたことを示す操作信号を制御部100に出力することが可能である。これにより、制御部100は、各操作ボタン22について、当該操作ボタン22が操作されたか否かを判断することができる。操作信号が入力された制御部100が他の構成要素を制御することによって、電子機器10では、操作された操作ボタン22に割り当てられている機能が実行される。 When each operation button 22 in the operation button group 220 is operated by the user 9, an operation signal indicating that the operation button 22 has been operated can be output to the control unit 100. Thereby, the control part 100 can judge whether the said operation button 22 was operated about each operation button 22. FIG. When the control unit 100 to which the operation signal is input controls other components, the electronic device 10 executes the function assigned to the operated operation button 22.
 衛星信号受信部140は、測位衛星が送信する衛星信号を受信することが可能である。そして、衛星信号受信部140は、受信した衛星信号に基づいて、電子機器10の位置を示す位置情報を取得することが可能である。衛星信号受信部140が取得する位置情報には、例えば、電子機器10の位置を示す緯度経度が含まれる。制御部100は、衛星信号受信部140を動作させたり、その動作を停止したりすることが可能である。以後、衛星信号受信部140を単に「受信部140」と呼ぶことがある。 Satellite signal receiving unit 140 can receive a satellite signal transmitted by a positioning satellite. Then, the satellite signal receiving unit 140 can acquire position information indicating the position of the electronic device 10 based on the received satellite signal. The position information acquired by the satellite signal receiving unit 140 includes, for example, latitude and longitude indicating the position of the electronic device 10. The control unit 100 can operate the satellite signal receiving unit 140 or stop its operation. Hereinafter, the satellite signal receiving unit 140 may be simply referred to as a “receiving unit 140”.
 受信部140は、例えばGPS受信機であって、GPS(Global Positioning System)の測位衛星からの無線信号を受信することが可能である。受信部140は、受信した無線信号に基づいて電子機器10の現在位置を例えば緯度経度で算出し、算出した緯度経度を含む位置情報を制御部100に出力する。電子機器10の位置情報は、当該電子機器10を持つユーザ9の位置を示す位置情報であるともいえる。 The receiving unit 140 is a GPS receiver, for example, and can receive a radio signal from a GPS (Global Positioning System) positioning satellite. The receiving unit 140 calculates the current position of the electronic device 10 based on the received wireless signal, for example, using latitude and longitude, and outputs position information including the calculated latitude and longitude to the control unit 100. It can be said that the position information of the electronic device 10 is position information indicating the position of the user 9 having the electronic device 10.
 なお受信部140は、GPS以外のGNSS(Global Navigation Satellite System)の測位衛星からの信号に基づいて電子機器10の位置情報を求めてもよい。例えば、受信部140は、GLONASS(Global Navigation Satellite System)、IRNSS(Indian Regional Navigational Satellite System)、COMPASS、Galileoあるいは準天頂衛星システム(QZSS:Quasi-Zenith Satellites System)の測位衛星からの信号に基づいて電子機器10の位置情報を求めてもよい。 Note that the receiving unit 140 may obtain the position information of the electronic device 10 based on a signal from a positioning satellite of GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System) other than GPS. For example, the receiving unit 140 is based on signals from positioning satellites of GLONASS (Global Navigation Satellite System), IRNSS (Indian Regional Navigation Satellite System), COMPASS, Galileo, or Quasi-Zenith Satellite System (QZSS). The position information of the electronic device 10 may be obtained.
 マイク170は、電子機器10の外部から入力される音を電気的な音信号に変換して制御部100に出力することが可能である。電子機器10の外部からの音は、マイク穴15から電子機器10の内部に取り込まれてマイク170に入力される。 The microphone 170 can convert a sound input from the outside of the electronic device 10 into an electrical sound signal and output it to the control unit 100. Sound from the outside of the electronic device 10 is taken into the electronic device 10 through the microphone hole 15 and input to the microphone 170.
 スピーカ160は、例えばダイナミックスピーカである。スピーカ160は、制御部100からの電気的な音信号を音に変換して出力することが可能である。スピーカ160から出力される音は、スピーカ穴14から外部に出力される。ユーザ9は、スピーカ穴14から出力される音を、電子機器10から離れた場所でも聞こえることが可能である。 The speaker 160 is, for example, a dynamic speaker. The speaker 160 can convert an electrical sound signal from the control unit 100 into a sound and output the sound. Sound output from the speaker 160 is output from the speaker hole 14 to the outside. The user 9 can hear the sound output from the speaker hole 14 even at a place away from the electronic device 10.
 レシーバ150は受話音を出力することが可能である。レシーバ150は例えばダイナミックスピーカである。レシーバ150は、制御部100からの電気的な音信号を音に変換して出力することが可能である。レシーバ150から出力される音はレシーバ穴13から外部に出力される。レシーバ穴13から出力される音の音量は、スピーカ穴14から出力される音の音量よりも小さくなっている。ユーザ9は、レシーバ穴13から出力される音を、当該レシーバ穴13に耳を近づけることによって聞くことができる。なお、レシーバ150の代わりに、機器ケース11の前面部分を振動させる、圧電振動素子等の振動素子を設けてもよい。この場合には、音は、当該前面部分の振動によりユーザに伝達される。 The receiver 150 can output a received sound. The receiver 150 is, for example, a dynamic speaker. The receiver 150 can convert an electrical sound signal from the control unit 100 into sound and output the sound. The sound output from the receiver 150 is output from the receiver hole 13 to the outside. The volume of the sound output from the receiver hole 13 is smaller than the volume of the sound output from the speaker hole 14. The user 9 can hear the sound output from the receiver hole 13 by bringing his ear close to the receiver hole 13. Instead of the receiver 150, a vibration element such as a piezoelectric vibration element that vibrates the front surface portion of the device case 11 may be provided. In this case, the sound is transmitted to the user by the vibration of the front portion.
 第1カメラ180は、レンズ181及びイメージセンサなどを備えている。第2カメラ190は、レンズ191及びイメージセンサなどを備えている。第1カメラ180及び第2カメラ190のそれぞれは、制御部100による制御に基づいて被写体を撮影し、撮影した被写体を示す静止画あるいは動画を生成して制御部100に出力することが可能である。 The first camera 180 includes a lens 181 and an image sensor. The second camera 190 includes a lens 191 and an image sensor. Each of the first camera 180 and the second camera 190 can photograph a subject based on control by the control unit 100, generate a still image or a moving image indicating the photographed subject, and output the still image or moving image to the control unit 100. .
 第1カメラ180のレンズ181は、機器ケース11の前面11aから視認可能となっている。したがって、第1カメラ180は、電子機器10の前面側(言い換えれば、表示領域12側)に存在する被写体を撮影することが可能である。第1カメラ180はインカメラと呼ばれる。一方で、第2カメラ190のレンズ191は、機器ケース11の背面11bから視認可能となっている。したがって、第2カメラ190は、電子機器10の背面側に存在する被写体を撮影することが可能である。第2カメラ190はアウトカメラと呼ばれる。 The lens 181 of the first camera 180 is visible from the front surface 11a of the device case 11. Therefore, the first camera 180 can shoot a subject existing on the front side of the electronic device 10 (in other words, on the display area 12 side). The first camera 180 is called an in camera. On the other hand, the lens 191 of the second camera 190 is visible from the back surface 11 b of the device case 11. Therefore, the second camera 190 can photograph a subject existing on the back side of the electronic device 10. The second camera 190 is called an out camera.
 加速度センサ200は、電子機器10の加速度を検出することが可能である。加速度センサ200は例えば3軸加速度センサである。加速度センサ200は、x軸方向、y軸方向及びz軸方向の電子機器10の加速度を検出することが可能である。x軸方向、y軸方向及びz軸方向は、例えば、電子機器10の長手方向、短手方向及び厚み方向にそれぞれ設定される。 The acceleration sensor 200 can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 10. The acceleration sensor 200 is, for example, a triaxial acceleration sensor. The acceleration sensor 200 can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 10 in the x-axis direction, the y-axis direction, and the z-axis direction. The x-axis direction, the y-axis direction, and the z-axis direction are set, for example, in the longitudinal direction, the short direction, and the thickness direction of the electronic device 10, respectively.
 電池230は電子機器10の電源を出力することが可能である。電池230は例えば充電式の電池である。電池230から出力される電源は、電子機器10が備える制御部100及び無線通信部110などの各種構成に対して供給される。 The battery 230 can output the power supply of the electronic device 10. The battery 230 is, for example, a rechargeable battery. The power output from the battery 230 is supplied to various components such as the control unit 100 and the wireless communication unit 110 included in the electronic device 10.
 なお電子機器10は、加速度センサ200を備えなくてもよい。この場合、電子機器10は、それとは別体の加速度センサと、無線あるいは有線で接続されてよい。 The electronic device 10 may not include the acceleration sensor 200. In this case, the electronic device 10 may be connected to an acceleration sensor separate from the electronic device 10 wirelessly or by wire.
 また電子機器10は、加速度センサ200以外のセンサを備えてもよい。例えば、電子機器10は、気圧センサ、地磁気センサ、温度センサ、近接センサ、照度センサ及びジャイロセンサの少なくとも一つを備えてもよい。また電子機器10は、それとは別体の、加速度センサ200以外のセンサと、無線あるいは有線で接続されてもよい。 The electronic device 10 may include a sensor other than the acceleration sensor 200. For example, the electronic device 10 may include at least one of an atmospheric pressure sensor, a geomagnetic sensor, a temperature sensor, a proximity sensor, an illuminance sensor, and a gyro sensor. The electronic device 10 may be connected to a sensor other than the acceleration sensor 200 other than the acceleration sensor 200 wirelessly or by wire.
 また電子機器10は、受信部140を備えなくてもよい。この場合、電子機器10は、それとは別体の受信部140と無線あるいは有線で接続されてよい。 The electronic device 10 may not include the receiving unit 140. In this case, the electronic device 10 may be connected to a receiving unit 140 separate from the electronic device 10 wirelessly or by wire.
 <制御部内の機能ブロックの一例>
 図5は、CPU101及びDSP102が記憶部103内の制御プログラム103aを実行することによって形成される一部の機能ブロックの一例を示す図である。
<Example of functional block in control unit>
FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of a part of functional blocks formed when the CPU 101 and the DSP 102 execute the control program 103 a in the storage unit 103.
 図5に示されるように、制御部100は、機能ブロックとして、歩数計測部300、状態特定部400、識別情報判定部500及び通知決定部600を備える。歩数計測部300、状態特定部400、識別情報判定部500及び通知決定部600の少なくとも一つは、その機能の実行にソフトウェアが不要なハードウェア回路で実現されてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 5, the control unit 100 includes a step count measuring unit 300, a state specifying unit 400, an identification information determining unit 500, and a notification determining unit 600 as functional blocks. At least one of the step count measurement unit 300, the state identification unit 400, the identification information determination unit 500, and the notification determination unit 600 may be realized by a hardware circuit that does not require software for executing the function.
 状態特定部400は、ユーザ9についての様々な状態を特定することが可能である。状態特定部400は、例えば、停止移動特定部410、屋内特定部420及び位置判定部430を備えている。停止移動特定部410、屋内特定部420及び位置判定部430の少なくとも一つは、その機能の実行にソフトウェアが不要なハードウェア回路で実現されてもよい。 The state specifying unit 400 can specify various states for the user 9. The state specifying unit 400 includes, for example, a stop movement specifying unit 410, an indoor specifying unit 420, and a position determining unit 430. At least one of the stop movement specifying unit 410, the indoor specifying unit 420, and the position determining unit 430 may be realized by a hardware circuit that does not require software to execute the function.
 なお、制御部100がメインCPUとサブCPUを備えている場合には、図5に示される複数の機能ブロックのうち、一部の機能ブロックをサブCPUで実現し、残りの機能ブロックをメインCPUで実現してもよい。例えば、停止移動特定部410をサブCPUで実現し、残りの機能ブロックをメインCPUで実現してもよい。 When the control unit 100 includes a main CPU and a sub CPU, some of the functional blocks shown in FIG. 5 are realized by the sub CPU, and the remaining functional blocks are the main CPU. It may be realized with. For example, the stop movement specifying unit 410 may be realized by a sub CPU, and the remaining functional blocks may be realized by a main CPU.
 停止移動特定部410は、ユーザ9の停止及び移動に関する、当該ユーザ9の状態を特定する停止移動特定を行うことが可能である。停止移動特定部410は、停止移動特定において、ユーザ9が停止していることと、ユーザ9が移動していることとを特定することが可能である。言い換えれば、停止移動特定部410は、ユーザ9の状態が、停止している状態であるのか、移動している状態であるかを判定することが可能である。さらに言い換えれば、停止移動特定部410は、ユーザ9が移動しているか否かを判定することが可能である。ユーザ9の停止は電子機器10の停止であると見ることができることから、停止移動特定部410は、電子機器10が停止しているか否かを判定する判定部として機能すると言える。停止移動特定部410は、例えば、受信部140で取得される位置情報及び加速度センサ200で検出される加速度の少なくとも一方に基づいて、ユーザ9が停止していることと、ユーザ9が移動していることを特定することが可能である。 The stop movement specifying unit 410 can specify stop movement specifying the state of the user 9 regarding the stop and movement of the user 9. The stop movement specifying unit 410 can specify that the user 9 is stopped and the user 9 is moving in the stop movement specification. In other words, the stop movement specifying unit 410 can determine whether the state of the user 9 is a stopped state or a moving state. In other words, the stop movement specifying unit 410 can determine whether or not the user 9 is moving. Since the stop of the user 9 can be regarded as a stop of the electronic device 10, the stop movement specifying unit 410 can be said to function as a determination unit that determines whether or not the electronic device 10 is stopped. For example, the stop movement specifying unit 410 is based on the fact that the user 9 has stopped and the user 9 has moved based on at least one of the position information acquired by the receiving unit 140 and the acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200. It is possible to specify that
 また停止移動特定部410は、停止移動特定において、ユーザ9の停止と、ユーザ9の移動開始とを特定することが可能である。停止移動特定部410は、ユーザ9の状態が、移動している状態から停止している状態に変化すると、ユーザ9が停止したと判断する。また停止移動特定部410は、ユーザ9の状態が、停止している状態から移動している状態に変化すると、ユーザ9が移動開始したと判断する。 Moreover, the stop movement specifying unit 410 can specify the stop of the user 9 and the start of movement of the user 9 in the stop movement specification. When the state of the user 9 changes from the moving state to the stopped state, the stop movement specifying unit 410 determines that the user 9 has stopped. Further, when the state of the user 9 changes from the stopped state to the moving state, the stop movement specifying unit 410 determines that the user 9 has started moving.
 ユーザ9の停止は、電子機器10の移動停止と言えることから、停止移動特定部410は、電子機器10の移動停止を特定することができると言える。またユーザ9の移動開始は、電子機器10の移動開始と言えることから、停止移動特定部410は、電子機器10の移動開始を特定することができると言える。 Since the stop of the user 9 can be said to be a stop of movement of the electronic device 10, it can be said that the stop movement specifying unit 410 can specify a stop of movement of the electronic device 10. In addition, since the start of movement of the user 9 can be said to be the start of movement of the electronic device 10, it can be said that the stop movement specifying unit 410 can specify the start of movement of the electronic device 10.
 また停止移動特定部410は、停止移動特定において、ユーザ9が移動していると判断する場合にユーザ9の移動手段を特定することが可能である。例えば、停止移動特定部410は、加速度センサ200で検出される加速度に基づいて、ユーザ9が乗り物に乗らずに自力で移動しているのか、ユーザ9が乗り物に乗って移動しているのかを特定することができる。ここで、ユーザ9が自力で移動するとは、ユーザ9が乗り物に乗らずに自らの足で移動することを意味する。ユーザ9が自力で移動することを「自力移動」と呼ぶと、停止移動特定部410はユーザ9の自力移動を特定することが可能であると言える。また、ユーザ9が乗り物に乗って移動することを「乗り物移動」と呼ぶと、停止移動特定部410はユーザ9の乗り物移動を特定することが可能である。 Also, the stop movement specifying unit 410 can specify the moving means of the user 9 when determining that the user 9 is moving in the stop movement specifying. For example, based on the acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200, the stop movement specifying unit 410 determines whether the user 9 is moving on his own without riding on the vehicle, or whether the user 9 is moving on the vehicle. Can be identified. Here, the fact that the user 9 moves on his own means that the user 9 moves on his / her foot without getting on the vehicle. If the movement of the user 9 by himself / herself is referred to as “self-movement”, it can be said that the stop movement specifying unit 410 can specify the user 9's own movement. In addition, when the movement of the user 9 on the vehicle is referred to as “vehicle movement”, the stop movement specifying unit 410 can specify the vehicle movement of the user 9.
 停止移動特定部410が特定することが可能な自力移動には、ユーザ9が歩いて移動することと、ユーザ9が走って移動することとが含まれる。ユーザ9が走って移動することを「走行」と呼ぶと、自力移動には、歩行及び走行が含まれる。また、停止移動特定部410が特定することが可能な乗り物移動には、ユーザ9が自転車で移動することと、ユーザ9が、自動車、電車及びバスなどの、自転車よりも速く移動することが可能な乗り物で移動することとが含まれる。 The self-movement that can be specified by the stop movement specifying unit 410 includes that the user 9 walks and the user 9 runs and moves. When the user 9 is running and moving is called “running”, the self-moving includes walking and running. In addition, in the vehicle movement that can be specified by the stop movement specifying unit 410, the user 9 can move by bicycle and the user 9 can move faster than a bicycle such as a car, a train, and a bus. Moving with a simple vehicle.
 以後、自転車と、それよりも速く移動することが可能な乗り物とを区別するために、単に「乗り物」と言えば、自転車よりも速く移動することが可能な乗り物を意味する。また、ユーザ9が自力移動する場合の移動手段の名称として「自力」を使用し、ユーザ9が歩いて移動する場合の移動手段の名称として「歩き」を使用し、ユーザ9が走って移動する場合の移動手段の名称として「走り」を使用する。 Hereinafter, in order to distinguish between a bicycle and a vehicle that can move faster than that, simply speaking “vehicle” means a vehicle that can move faster than a bicycle. Further, “self” is used as the name of the moving means when the user 9 moves by himself, and “walking” is used as the name of the moving means when the user 9 moves by walking, and the user 9 runs and moves. “Run” is used as the name of the moving means in the case.
 ここで、電子機器10の加速度が、当該電子機器10を持つユーザ9の移動手段に応じた固有の時間変化のパターンを示すことが知られている。停止移動特定部410は、加速度センサ200で検出される加速度の時間変化のパターンが、「歩き」に応じたパターンを示す場合には、ユーザ9の移動手段が「歩き」であると特定する。また、停止移動特定部410は、加速度センサ200で検出される加速度の時間変化のパターンが、「走り」に応じたパターンを示す場合には、ユーザ9の移動手段が「走り」であると特定する。また、停止移動特定部410は、加速度センサ200で検出される加速度の時間変化のパターンが、「自転車」に応じたパターンを示す場合には、ユーザ9の移動手段が「自転車」であると特定する。そして、停止移動特定部410は、加速度センサ200で検出される加速度の時間変化のパターンが、「乗り物」に応じたパターンを示す場合には、ユーザ9の移動手段が「乗り物」であると特定する。 Here, it is known that the acceleration of the electronic device 10 shows a unique temporal change pattern according to the moving means of the user 9 having the electronic device 10. The stop movement specifying unit 410 specifies that the moving means of the user 9 is “walking” when the pattern of the time change in acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200 indicates a pattern corresponding to “walking”. The stop movement specifying unit 410 specifies that the moving means of the user 9 is “running” when the pattern of the time change of acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200 indicates a pattern corresponding to “running”. To do. In addition, the stop movement specifying unit 410 specifies that the moving means of the user 9 is “bicycle” when the temporal change pattern of acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200 indicates a pattern corresponding to “bicycle”. To do. Then, the stop movement specifying unit 410 specifies that the moving means of the user 9 is the “vehicle” when the pattern of the time change of the acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200 indicates a pattern corresponding to the “vehicle”. To do.
 このようにして、停止移動特定部410は、ユーザ9の移動手段が、歩き、走り、自転車及び乗り物のいずれであるのかを特定することができる。制御部100は、例えば、停止移動特定部410で特定される移動手段と、ユーザ9の移動距離(言い換えれば、電子機器10の移動距離)とを、表示部120に表示させることができる。これにより、ユーザ9は、歩行距離、走行距離、自転車での移動距離及び乗り物での移動距離を区別して確認することができる。制御部100は、例えば、受信部140で取得される位置情報に基づいて、ユーザ9の移動距離を求めることができる。 In this way, the stop movement specifying unit 410 can specify whether the moving means of the user 9 is walking, running, bicycle, or vehicle. For example, the control unit 100 can cause the display unit 120 to display the moving means specified by the stop movement specifying unit 410 and the moving distance of the user 9 (in other words, the moving distance of the electronic device 10). Thereby, the user 9 can distinguish and confirm the walking distance, the travel distance, the travel distance by bicycle, and the travel distance by vehicle. For example, the control unit 100 can obtain the moving distance of the user 9 based on the position information acquired by the receiving unit 140.
 屋内特定部420は、ユーザ9が、家、ビル及びお店等の建物の中に存在することを特定することが可能である。つまり、屋内特定部420は、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することを特定する屋内特定を行うことが可能である。以後、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することを単に「屋内」と呼び、ユーザ9が屋内に存在しないことを単に「屋外」と呼ぶことがある。屋内特定について後で詳細に説明する。 The indoor specifying unit 420 can specify that the user 9 exists in a building such as a house, a building, or a store. That is, the indoor specifying unit 420 can perform indoor specifying that specifies that the user 9 exists indoors. Hereinafter, the presence of the user 9 indoors may be simply referred to as “indoor”, and the absence of the user 9 indoors may be simply referred to as “outdoor”. The indoor identification will be described in detail later.
 位置判定部430は、ユーザ9が所定領域(言い換えれば、所定場所)に位置するか否かを判定することが可能である。言い換えれば、位置判定部430は、電子機器10が所定領域(言い換えれば、所定場所)に位置するか否かを判定することが可能である。所定領域としては、例えば、歩行者と車両6との事故が発生しやすい場所と、その近傍とを含む領域とが採用される。所定領域には、例えば、交差点2とその近傍を含む交差点領域、T字路とその近傍を含むT字路領域及び子供の通学路とその近傍を含む通学路領域とが含まれる。位置判定部430は、ユーザ9が交差点領域に位置するか否かと、ユーザ9がT字路領域に位置するか否かと、ユーザ9が通学路領域に位置するか否かのそれぞれを個別に判定することができる。 The position determination unit 430 can determine whether or not the user 9 is located in a predetermined area (in other words, a predetermined place). In other words, the position determination unit 430 can determine whether or not the electronic device 10 is located in a predetermined area (in other words, a predetermined place). As the predetermined region, for example, a region including a place where an accident between a pedestrian and the vehicle 6 easily occurs and a region including the vicinity thereof are employed. The predetermined area includes, for example, an intersection area including the intersection 2 and the vicinity thereof, a T-junction area including the T-junction and the vicinity thereof, and a school commuting area including the child's school road and the vicinity thereof. The position determination unit 430 individually determines whether the user 9 is located in the intersection area, whether the user 9 is located in the T-junction area, and whether the user 9 is located in the school road area. can do.
 位置判定部430は、例えば、受信部140で取得される位置情報と、記憶部103に記憶される地図情報とに基づいて、ユーザ9が所定領域に位置するか否かを判定することが可能である。また位置判定部430は、交差点2等に配置されている路側機5からの信号を無線通信部110が受信できるか否かに基づいて、ユーザ9が所定領域に位置するか否かを判定してもよい。 For example, the position determination unit 430 can determine whether or not the user 9 is located in a predetermined area based on the position information acquired by the reception unit 140 and the map information stored in the storage unit 103. It is. Further, the position determination unit 430 determines whether or not the user 9 is located in a predetermined area based on whether or not the wireless communication unit 110 can receive a signal from the roadside device 5 arranged at the intersection 2 or the like. May be.
 以上のように、状態特定部400は、ユーザ9についての様々な状態を特定することが可能である。なお、状態特定部400が特定するユーザ9の状態の種類は上記の限りではない。 As described above, the state specifying unit 400 can specify various states for the user 9. Note that the type of state of the user 9 specified by the state specifying unit 400 is not limited to the above.
 歩数計測部300は、自力移動しているユーザ9の歩数を計測することが可能である。歩数計測部300は、例えば、加速度センサ200で検出される加速度に基づいて、自力移動しているユーザ9の歩数を計測する。歩数計測部300は、ユーザ9が歩行あるいは走行していると停止移動特定部410が特定しているときに、ユーザ9の歩数を計測する。制御部100は、歩数計測部300で測定される歩数を表示部120に表示させることが可能である。 The step count measuring unit 300 can measure the number of steps of the user 9 moving by himself. The step count measuring unit 300 measures, for example, the number of steps of the user 9 moving by himself / herself based on the acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200. The step count measuring unit 300 measures the number of steps of the user 9 when the stop movement specifying unit 410 specifies that the user 9 is walking or running. The control unit 100 can display the number of steps measured by the step count measuring unit 300 on the display unit 120.
 識別情報判定部500は、記憶部103に記憶されている登録識別情報と、無線通信部110が通信装置から受信する、当該通信装置に割り当てられた識別情報とが一致するか否かを判定する。識別情報判定部500での判定結果は、屋内特定において利用される。識別情報判定部500の動作については後で詳細に説明する。 The identification information determination unit 500 determines whether or not the registration identification information stored in the storage unit 103 matches the identification information assigned to the communication device received by the wireless communication unit 110 from the communication device. . The determination result in the identification information determination unit 500 is used for indoor identification. The operation of the identification information determination unit 500 will be described in detail later.
 通知決定部600は、状態特定部400で特定されるユーザ9の状態などに基づいて、電子機器10の外部に電子機器10が通知を行うか否かを決定する決定処理を行うことが可能である。 The notification determination unit 600 can perform a determination process for determining whether or not the electronic device 10 notifies the outside of the electronic device 10 based on the state of the user 9 specified by the state specifying unit 400. is there.
 例えば、ユーザ9が交差点領域に位置すると位置判定部430が判定し、かつユーザ9の移動手段が「走り」であると停止移動特定部410が特定する場合、通知決定部600は、電子機器10の外部に電子機器10が通知を行うことを決定する。また、ユーザ9が交差点領域に位置すると位置判定部430が判定し、かつユーザ9の移動手段が「自転車」であると停止移動特定部410が特定する場合、通知決定部600は、電子機器10の外部に電子機器10が通知を行うことを決定する。通知決定部600が、電子機器10の外部に電子機器10が通知を行うことを決定すると、例えば、交差点領域に位置する車両6に対してユーザ9(歩行者)が近くに存在することを通知するための存在通知情報が無線通信部110から路側機5に通知される。存在通知情報には、停止移動特定部410が特定するユーザ9の移動手段を示す情報が含まれてもよい。路側機5は、受信した存在通知情報を、交差点領域に存在する車両6に送信する。このとき、路側機5は、例えばブロードキャストで存在通知情報を送信する。車両6は、受信した存在通知情報に基づいて、例えば運転者に対して警告を行う。車両6は、例えば、カーナビゲーション装置を利用して、歩行者が近くにいることを運転者に通知する。これにより、交差点領域に存在する車両6の運転手は、当該交差点領域に人が存在することを認識しながら運転を行うことができる。その結果、車両6の運転の安全性が向上する。以後、電子機器10の外部に電子機器10が通知を行うことを「通知実行」と呼ぶことがある。また、電子機器10の外部に電子機器10が通知を行わないことを「通知非実行」と呼ぶことがある。 For example, when the position determination unit 430 determines that the user 9 is located in the intersection area, and the stop movement specifying unit 410 specifies that the moving means of the user 9 is “running”, the notification determination unit 600 includes the electronic device 10. The electronic device 10 decides to make a notification to the outside. In addition, when the position determination unit 430 determines that the user 9 is located in the intersection area and the stop movement specifying unit 410 specifies that the moving means of the user 9 is “bicycle”, the notification determining unit 600 includes the electronic device 10. The electronic device 10 decides to make a notification to the outside. When the notification determining unit 600 determines that the electronic device 10 notifies the outside of the electronic device 10, for example, the user 9 (pedestrian) is notified that the user 9 (pedestrian) is nearby to the vehicle 6 located in the intersection area. Presence notification information for this is notified from the wireless communication unit 110 to the roadside device 5. The presence notification information may include information indicating the moving means of the user 9 specified by the stop movement specifying unit 410. The roadside machine 5 transmits the received presence notification information to the vehicle 6 existing in the intersection area. At this time, the roadside device 5 transmits the presence notification information by broadcast, for example. The vehicle 6 warns the driver, for example, based on the received presence notification information. The vehicle 6 notifies the driver that a pedestrian is nearby using, for example, a car navigation device. Thereby, the driver of the vehicle 6 existing in the intersection area can drive while recognizing that a person exists in the intersection area. As a result, the driving safety of the vehicle 6 is improved. Hereinafter, the notification by the electronic device 10 to the outside of the electronic device 10 may be referred to as “notification execution”. Also, the fact that the electronic device 10 does not notify the outside of the electronic device 10 may be referred to as “notification non-execution”.
 なお、電子機器10がその外部に通知する情報の内容は上記の例に限られない。また、電子機器10は車両6に対して直接通知を行うことも可能である。 In addition, the content of the information notified to the outside by the electronic device 10 is not limited to the above example. The electronic device 10 can also notify the vehicle 6 directly.
 <屋内特定の一例>
 次に、本例の屋内特定について詳細に説明する。無線LANを用いて無線通信を行う通信装置の一種であるアクセスポイトに対しては、BSSID(Basic Service Set Identifier)と呼ばれる識別情報が割り当てられている。BSSIDは各アクセスポイントに固有の情報である。アクセスポイントのユーザは、当該アクセスポイントに割り当てられたBSSIDの内容を変更することはできない。BSSIDには、例えばMACアドレスが採用される。MACアドレス以外の情報がBSSIDに採用されてもよい。
<Example of indoor specific>
Next, indoor identification of this example will be described in detail. Identification information called BSSID (Basic Service Set Identifier) is assigned to an access point that is a type of communication device that performs wireless communication using a wireless LAN. BSSID is information unique to each access point. The user of the access point cannot change the contents of the BSSID assigned to the access point. For example, a MAC address is adopted as the BSSID. Information other than the MAC address may be adopted for the BSSID.
 またアクセスポイントには、BSSIDとは別に、ESSID(Extended SSID)という識別情報も割り当てられている。ESSIDは、ネットワーク名と呼ばれることがある。アクセスポイントのユーザは、当該アクセスポイントに割り当てられたネットワーク名の内容を変更することが可能である。ユーザは、例えば、アクセスポイントを操作することによって、当該アクセスポイントに割り当てられたネットワーク名の内容を変更することが可能である。アクセスポイントは、自身に割り当てられているBSSID及びネットワーク名を、例えば、ブロードキャストで定期的に無線送信することが可能である。電子機器10は、アクセスポイントからのBSSID及びネットワーク名の両方を受信することができる。 In addition to the BSSID, identification information called ESSID (Extended SSID) is also assigned to the access point. The ESSID is sometimes called a network name. The user of the access point can change the contents of the network name assigned to the access point. For example, the user can change the contents of the network name assigned to the access point by operating the access point. The access point can wirelessly periodically transmit the BSSID and network name assigned to the access point, for example, by broadcast. The electronic device 10 can receive both the BSSID and the network name from the access point.
 ここで、アクセスポイントに割り当てられたネットワーク名は変更可能であることから、一つの建物内に設けられた複数のアクセスポイントのネットワーク名は互いに同じに設定されることがある。つまり、一つの建物内に設けられた複数のアクセスポイントに対して共通のネットワーク名が割り当てられることがある。例えば、ある会社の事業所のビルに複数のアクセスポイントが配置される場合、当該複数のアクセスポイントのネットワーク名として、当該事業所の名称が採用されることがある。複数のアクセスポイントに対して共通に割り当てられたネットワーク名は、当該複数のアクセスポイントが構成するグループのグループ名であるとも言える。 Here, since the network name assigned to the access point can be changed, the network names of a plurality of access points provided in one building may be set to be the same. That is, a common network name may be assigned to a plurality of access points provided in one building. For example, when a plurality of access points are arranged in a building of a company office, the name of the office may be adopted as the network name of the plurality of access points. It can be said that the network name commonly assigned to a plurality of access points is a group name of a group formed by the plurality of access points.
 本例では、記憶部103には、あるネットワーク名が登録ネットワーク名として登録される。登録ネットワーク名は登録識別情報であるとも言える。登録ネットワーク名の登録方法は後で説明する。制御部100は、無線通信部110がアクセスポイントから受信するネットワーク名(識別情報)と、記憶部103内の登録ネットワーク名(登録識別情報)とが一致するか否かを判定し、その判定結果に基づいて屋内特定を行う。 In this example, a certain network name is registered in the storage unit 103 as a registered network name. It can be said that the registered network name is registered identification information. The registration method of the registered network name will be described later. The control unit 100 determines whether or not the network name (identification information) received by the wireless communication unit 110 from the access point matches the registered network name (registration identification information) in the storage unit 103, and the determination result Based on the indoor identification.
 図6は、屋内特定に関する処理(以後、「屋内特定関連処理」)を実行する電子機器10の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。電子機器10は、図6に示される屋内特定関連処理を、定期的にあるいは不定期的に繰り返し実行する。 FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic device 10 that executes processing relating to indoor identification (hereinafter, “indoor identification related processing”). The electronic device 10 repeatedly executes the indoor identification related process shown in FIG. 6 periodically or irregularly.
 図6に示されるように、ステップs1において、制御部100は、無線通信部110がネットワーク名を受信したか否かを判定する。言い換えれば、制御部100は、無線通信部110での受信信号からネットワーク名を取得できたか否かを判定する。ステップs1は、無線通信部110がネットワーク名を受信したと判定されるまで実行される。 As shown in FIG. 6, in step s1, the control unit 100 determines whether or not the wireless communication unit 110 has received a network name. In other words, the control unit 100 determines whether or not the network name has been acquired from the received signal at the wireless communication unit 110. Step s1 is executed until it is determined that the wireless communication unit 110 has received the network name.
 ステップs1において無線通信部110がネットワーク名を受信したと判定されると、ステップs2において、識別情報判定部500は、無線通信部110がアクセスポイントから受信したネットワーク名(以後、「受信ネットワーク名」と呼ぶことがある)と、記憶部103内の登録ネットワーク名とが一致するか否かを判定する。ステップs2において、受信ネットワーク名と登録ネットワーク名とが一致しないと判定されると、屋内特定関連処理は終了する。一方で、受信ネットワーク名と登録ネットワーク名とが一致すると判定されると、ステップs3において、屋内特定部420は、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると判断する。ステップs3が実行されると、屋内特定関連処理は終了する。 When it is determined in step s1 that the wireless communication unit 110 has received the network name, in step s2, the identification information determination unit 500 displays the network name received from the access point by the wireless communication unit 110 (hereinafter “received network name”). It is determined whether or not the registered network name in the storage unit 103 matches. If it is determined in step s2 that the received network name and the registered network name do not match, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received network name matches the registered network name, in step s3, the indoor specifying unit 420 determines that the user 9 exists indoors. When step s3 is executed, the indoor identification related process ends.
 なお、ステップs1において、複数のネットワーク名が受信されたと判定された場合には、ステップs2では、当該複数のネットワーク名のそれぞれが登録ネットワーク名と一致するか否かが判定される。そして、ステップs3では、当該複数のネットワーク名の少なくとも一つが登録ネットワーク名と一致すると判定されると、「屋内」と判定される。一方で、当該複数のネットワーク名のすべてが登録ネットワーク名と一致しない場合には、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。 If it is determined in step s1 that a plurality of network names have been received, it is determined in step s2 whether or not each of the plurality of network names matches the registered network name. In step s3, if it is determined that at least one of the plurality of network names matches the registered network name, it is determined as “indoor”. On the other hand, if all of the plurality of network names do not match the registered network name, the indoor identification related process ends.
 また記憶部103には、複数の登録ネットワーク名が登録されてもよい。この場合、受信されたネットワーク名が、複数の登録ネットワーク名のいずれかと一致する場合、「屋内」と判定される。また、ステップs1で複数のネットワーク名が受信されたと判定されると、当該複数のネットワーク名において、複数の登録ネットワーク名のいずれかと一致するネットワーク名が含まれる場合、「屋内」と判定される。 Also, a plurality of registered network names may be registered in the storage unit 103. In this case, if the received network name matches any of a plurality of registered network names, it is determined as “indoor”. If it is determined in step s1 that a plurality of network names have been received, if the plurality of network names include a network name that matches any of the plurality of registered network names, it is determined to be “indoor”.
 上述のように、ネットワーク名の内容は変更することが可能であることから、同じ建物内の複数のアクセスポイントに対して共通のネットワーク名が割り当てられることがある。同じ建物内の複数のアクセスポイントに対して共通に割り当てられたネットワーク名(以後、「共通ネットワーク名」と呼ぶことがある)が登録ネットワーク名として記憶部103に登録される場合、受信ネットワーク名が登録ネットワーク名と一致するときには、無線通信部110は、屋内のアクセスポイントと通信している可能性が高い。したがって、受信ネットワーク名が登録ネットワーク名と一致する場合には、ユーザ9が屋内に存在する可能性が高い。 As described above, since the contents of the network name can be changed, a common network name may be assigned to a plurality of access points in the same building. When a network name commonly assigned to a plurality of access points in the same building (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “common network name”) is registered in the storage unit 103 as a registered network name, the receiving network name is When the name matches the registered network name, the wireless communication unit 110 is likely to be communicating with an indoor access point. Therefore, when the receiving network name matches the registered network name, there is a high possibility that the user 9 is present indoors.
 そこで、本例では、共通ネットワーク名が登録ネットワーク名として登録される可能性を考慮して、ステップs2において受信ネットワーク名と登録ネットワーク名とが一致すると判定される場合には、屋内特定部420は、ステップs3を実行して「屋内」と判定する。一方で、受信ネットワーク名が登録ネットワーク名と異なる場合には、ユーザ9が屋内に存在するか否かは不明である。したがって、受信ネットワーク名と登録ネットワーク名とが一致しないと判定される場合には、屋内特定部420は「屋内」と判定しない。 Therefore, in this example, in consideration of the possibility that the common network name is registered as the registered network name, if it is determined in step s2 that the received network name matches the registered network name, the indoor identifying unit 420 , Step s3 is executed to determine “indoor”. On the other hand, if the receiving network name is different from the registered network name, it is unknown whether or not the user 9 is indoors. Therefore, when it is determined that the received network name and the registered network name do not match, the indoor identifying unit 420 does not determine “indoor”.
 このように、屋内特定部420は、受信ネットワーク名と登録ネットワーク名とが一致するか否かの判定結果に基づいて、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することを特定することから、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することをより正しく特定することができる。 As described above, the indoor specifying unit 420 specifies that the user 9 exists indoors based on the determination result of whether or not the received network name matches the registered network name. It can be specified more accurately.
 図7は、複数のアクセスポイントが設けられた建物700内に、電子機器10を持ったユーザ9が存在する様子の一例を示す図である。図7の例では、建物700の1階部分710には部屋711及び部屋712が存在し、建物700の2階部分720には部屋721及び部屋722が存在する。部屋711、部屋712、部屋721及び部屋722には、複数のアクセスポイント801~804がそれぞれ設けられている。複数のアクセスポイント801~804には共通のネットワーク名が割り当てられている。電子機器10の記憶部103には、アクセスポイント801~804に割り当てられた共通ネットワーク名が登録ネットワーク名として登録されている。 FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state in which a user 9 having the electronic device 10 is present in a building 700 provided with a plurality of access points. In the example of FIG. 7, a room 711 and a room 712 exist in the first floor portion 710 of the building 700, and a room 721 and a room 722 exist in the second floor portion 720 of the building 700. A plurality of access points 801 to 804 are provided in the room 711, the room 712, the room 721, and the room 722, respectively. A common network name is assigned to the plurality of access points 801 to 804. In the storage unit 103 of the electronic device 10, the common network names assigned to the access points 801 to 804 are registered as registered network names.
 図7に示されるように、例えば、ユーザ9が2階部分720の部屋721に存在する場合には、無線通信部110が受信する受信ネットワーク名と、記憶部103内の登録ネットワーク名とは一致する。したがって、屋内特定部420は、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると判定する。また、ユーザ9が2階部分720の部屋721から1階部分710の部屋712に移動した場合であっても、無線通信部110が受信する受信ネットワーク名と、記憶部103内の登録ネットワーク名とは一致する。したがって、屋内特定部420は、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると判定する。ユーザ9が部屋711、部屋712、部屋721及び部屋722のいずれに存在する場合であっても、屋内特定部420は、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することを特定することができる。 As shown in FIG. 7, for example, when the user 9 exists in the room 721 of the second floor portion 720, the received network name received by the wireless communication unit 110 matches the registered network name in the storage unit 103. To do. Therefore, the indoor identifying unit 420 determines that the user 9 is present indoors. Further, even when the user 9 moves from the room 721 of the second floor portion 720 to the room 712 of the first floor portion 710, the reception network name received by the wireless communication unit 110, the registered network name in the storage unit 103, and Match. Therefore, the indoor identifying unit 420 determines that the user 9 is present indoors. Even if the user 9 exists in any of the room 711, the room 712, the room 721, and the room 722, the indoor specifying unit 420 can specify that the user 9 exists indoors.
 また本例では、屋内の複数のアクセスポイントに共通のネットワーク名が登録ネットワーク名として電子機器10に一度登録されると、その後は、ネットワーク名を電子機器10に登録しなくても、当該複数のアクセスポイントのいずれと電子機器10が通信する場合であっても、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することを特定することができる。 In this example, once a network name common to a plurality of indoor access points is registered once as a registered network name in the electronic device 10, the network name is not registered in the electronic device 10 thereafter. Even when any one of the access points communicates with the electronic device 10, it can be specified that the user 9 is present indoors.
 これに対して、ネットワーク名の代わりに、アクセスポイントごとに別の内容を示すBSSIDを用いて屋内特定を行う場合には、屋内に設けられた複数のアクセスポイントのBSSIDをすべて電子機器10に登録しないと、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することを適切に特定できない可能性がある。 On the other hand, when performing indoor identification using a BSSID indicating different contents for each access point instead of the network name, all BSSIDs of a plurality of access points provided indoors are registered in the electronic device 10. Otherwise, there is a possibility that the user 9 cannot be properly identified as being indoors.
 図7の例において、例えば、アクセスポイント803のBSSIDが登録BSSIDとして記憶部103に登録されている場合を考える。この場合、ユーザ9が部屋721に存在するときには、無線通信部110が受信するBSSIDと登録BSSIDとが一致することから、屋内特定では「屋内」と判定される。一方で、ユーザ9が部屋712に存在する場合には、無線通信部110が受信するBSSIDと登録BSSIDとは一致しない。したがって、ユーザ9が部屋712に存在するにもかかわらず、屋内特定では「屋内」と判定されない。ユーザ9が部屋711、部屋712、部屋721及び部屋722のいずれに存在する場合であっても、屋内特定部420が「屋内」と判定するためには、アクセスポイント801~804のすべてのBSSIDを登録BSSIDとして記憶部103に登録する必要がある。言い換えれば、電子機器10がアクセスポイント801~804のいずれと通信する場合であっても、屋内特定部420が「屋内」と判定するためには、アクセスポイント801~804のすべてのBSSIDを登録BSSIDとして記憶部103に登録する必要がある。 In the example of FIG. 7, for example, consider a case where the BSSID of the access point 803 is registered in the storage unit 103 as a registered BSSID. In this case, when the user 9 is present in the room 721, the BSSID received by the wireless communication unit 110 and the registered BSSID match, so that the indoor identification is determined as “indoor”. On the other hand, when the user 9 exists in the room 712, the BSSID received by the wireless communication unit 110 and the registered BSSID do not match. Therefore, although the user 9 exists in the room 712, it is not determined as “indoor” in the indoor identification. Regardless of whether the user 9 exists in the room 711, the room 712, the room 721, or the room 722, in order for the indoor identification unit 420 to determine “indoor”, all the BSSIDs of the access points 801 to 804 are set. It is necessary to register in the storage unit 103 as a registered BSSID. In other words, even if the electronic device 10 communicates with any of the access points 801 to 804, in order for the indoor identifying unit 420 to determine “indoor”, all the BSSIDs of the access points 801 to 804 are registered BSSIDs. Must be registered in the storage unit 103.
 本例では、屋内の複数のアクセスポイントに共通のネットワーク名を登録ネットワーク名として電子機器10に登録するだけで、当該複数のアクセスポイントのいずれと電子機器10が通信する場合であっても、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると正しく特定することができる。よって、電子機器10の性能がさらに向上する。 In this example, only by registering a network name common to a plurality of indoor access points as a registered network name in the electronic device 10, the user can communicate with any of the plurality of access points with the electronic device 10. It can be correctly specified that 9 exists indoors. Therefore, the performance of the electronic device 10 is further improved.
 <ネットワーク名の登録方法の一例>
 次にネットワーク名の登録方法の例について説明する。電子機器10の動作モードには、ネットワーク名を登録する登録モードが含まれている。ユーザ9が例えば表示領域12に対して所定の操作を行うと、電子機器10の動作モードは登録モードに変更される。
<Example of network name registration method>
Next, an example of a network name registration method will be described. The operation mode of the electronic device 10 includes a registration mode for registering a network name. When the user 9 performs a predetermined operation on the display area 12, for example, the operation mode of the electronic device 10 is changed to the registration mode.
 図8は、登録モードの電子機器10の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。電子機器10の動作モードが登録モードになると、図8に示されるように、ステップs11において、制御部100は、無線通信部110が受信するネットワーク名の一覧を表示部120に表示させる。次にステップs12において、表示部120に表示されるネットワーク名を、登録ネットワーク名として電子機器10に登録することを指示するためのユーザ9の登録指示操作を操作部210が受け付ける。次にステップs13において、制御部100は、ステップs12で受け付けられた登録指示操作によって指定されたネットワーク名を記憶部103に登録する。これにより、記憶部103には、登録ネットワーク名が記憶される。その後、例えば表示領域12に対して所定の操作が行われると、登録モードが解除される。 FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic device 10 in the registration mode. When the operation mode of the electronic device 10 is the registration mode, as illustrated in FIG. 8, the control unit 100 causes the display unit 120 to display a list of network names received by the wireless communication unit 110 in step s11. Next, in step s12, the operation unit 210 accepts a registration instruction operation of the user 9 for instructing to register the network name displayed on the display unit 120 in the electronic device 10 as a registered network name. Next, in step s13, the control unit 100 registers the network name designated by the registration instruction operation received in step s12 in the storage unit 103. As a result, the registered network name is stored in the storage unit 103. Thereafter, for example, when a predetermined operation is performed on the display area 12, the registration mode is canceled.
 登録指示操作としては、例えば、表示領域12に表示されるネットワーク名に対するタップ操作が考えられる。ユーザ9は、表示領域12に表示されるネットワーク名のうち、共通ネットワーク名をタップ操作することによって、当該共通ネットワーク名を登録対象として指定する。指定された共通ネットワーク名はステップs13において記憶部103に登録される。 As the registration instruction operation, for example, a tap operation on the network name displayed in the display area 12 can be considered. The user 9 specifies the common network name as a registration target by tapping the common network name among the network names displayed in the display area 12. The designated common network name is registered in the storage unit 103 in step s13.
 例えば、上述の図7に示される部屋721にユーザ9が存在する場合に、電子機器10の動作モードが登録モードに変更されると、表示部120には、アクセスポイント801~804の共通ネットワーク名が表示される。ユーザ9が、表示領域12に表示される共通ネットワーク名をタップ操作すると、当該共通ネットワーク名が登録ネットワーク名として記憶部103に登録される。これにより、ユーザ9が部屋711、部屋712、部屋721及び部屋722のいずれに存在する場合であっても、電子機器10はユーザ9が屋内に存在することを正しく特定することができる。 For example, when the user 9 is present in the room 721 shown in FIG. 7 and the operation mode of the electronic device 10 is changed to the registration mode, the display unit 120 displays the common network names of the access points 801 to 804. Is displayed. When the user 9 taps a common network name displayed in the display area 12, the common network name is registered in the storage unit 103 as a registered network name. Thereby, even if the user 9 exists in any of the room 711, the room 712, the room 721, and the room 722, the electronic device 10 can correctly specify that the user 9 exists indoors.
 なお上記の例では、電子機器10に対するユーザ操作によってネットワーク名が電子機器10に登録されていたが、ネットワーク名は自動的に電子機器10に登録されてもよい。図9はこの場合の電子機器10の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。電子機器10は図9に示される登録処理を定期的にあるいは不定期的に繰り返し実行する。 In the above example, the network name is registered in the electronic device 10 by a user operation on the electronic device 10, but the network name may be automatically registered in the electronic device 10. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the electronic device 10 in this case. The electronic device 10 repeatedly executes the registration process shown in FIG. 9 periodically or irregularly.
 図9に示されるように、ステップs21において、制御部100は、無線通信部110がネットワーク名を受信したか否かを判定する。ステップs21は、無線通信部110がネットワーク名を受信したと判定されるまで実行される。 As shown in FIG. 9, in step s21, the control unit 100 determines whether or not the wireless communication unit 110 has received a network name. Step s21 is executed until it is determined that the wireless communication unit 110 has received the network name.
 ステップs21において無線通信部110がネットワーク名を受信したと判定されると、ステップs22において、制御部100の停止移動特定部410は、電子機器10が停止しているか否かを判定する。ステップs22において、電子機器10が停止していないと判定されると、登録処理は終了する。一方で、ステップs22において、電子機器10が停止していると判定されると、ステップs23において、制御部100は、ステップs21で受信したネットワーク名を登録ネットワーク名として記憶部103に登録する。ただし、ステップs21で受信したネットワーク名がすでに登録されている場合には、当該ネットワーク名は登録されない。電子機器10が停止している場合には、ユーザ9が屋内に存在する可能性が高い。したがって、電子機器10が停止している場合に無線通信部110がアクセスポイントからネットワーク名を受信する場合には、そのアクセスポイントは屋内に存在する可能性が高い。よって、電子機器10が停止している場合に無線通信部110が受信するネットワーク名を登録ネットワーク名とすることによって、屋内に存在する複数のネットワーク名に割り当てられた共通ネットワーク名が登録ネットワーク名となる可能性が高くなる。例えば図7に示される部屋712内の机等に電子機器10が置かれる場合には、アクセスポイント801~804に共通のネットワーク名が登録ネットワーク名として記憶部103に登録される。 If it is determined in step s21 that the wireless communication unit 110 has received the network name, the stop movement specifying unit 410 of the control unit 100 determines whether or not the electronic device 10 is stopped in step s22. If it is determined in step s22 that the electronic device 10 has not stopped, the registration process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s22 that the electronic device 10 is stopped, in step s23, the control unit 100 registers the network name received in step s21 in the storage unit 103 as a registered network name. However, if the network name received in step s21 has already been registered, the network name is not registered. When the electronic device 10 is stopped, there is a high possibility that the user 9 is present indoors. Therefore, when the wireless communication unit 110 receives a network name from an access point when the electronic device 10 is stopped, the access point is likely to exist indoors. Therefore, by using the network name received by the wireless communication unit 110 when the electronic device 10 is stopped as the registered network name, the common network name assigned to the plurality of network names existing indoors is the registered network name. Is likely to be. For example, when the electronic device 10 is placed on a desk or the like in the room 712 shown in FIG. 7, a network name common to the access points 801 to 804 is registered in the storage unit 103 as a registered network name.
 なお、登録処理においては、図10に示されるように、ステップs22の代りにステップs25が実行されてもよい。ステップs25では、制御部100は、無線通信部110が所定の時間帯でネットワーク名を受信したか否かを判定する。言い換えれば、制御部100は、ステップs21でのネットワーク名の受信時刻が所定の時間帯に含まれているか否かを判定する。所定の時間帯としては、ユーザ9が屋内にいる可能性が高い時間帯、例えば夜中の時間帯が考えられる。夜中の時間帯としては、例えば、午後11時から午前2時までの時間帯が考えられる。また、制御部100が、受信部140で取得される位置情報等に基づいて、ユーザ9が屋内に存在する可能性が高い時間帯を推定する場合には、推定された当該時間帯でネットワーク名が受信されたか否かが判定されてもよい。ステップs25において、制御部100は、無線通信部110が所定の時間帯でネットワーク名を受信したと判定すると、ステップs23を実行して、当該ネットワーク名を登録ネットワーク名として記憶部103に登録する。 In the registration process, as shown in FIG. 10, step s25 may be executed instead of step s22. In step s25, the control unit 100 determines whether the wireless communication unit 110 has received a network name in a predetermined time zone. In other words, the control unit 100 determines whether or not the reception time of the network name in step s21 is included in the predetermined time zone. As the predetermined time zone, a time zone in which there is a high possibility that the user 9 is indoors, for example, a midnight time zone can be considered. As a time zone in the middle of the night, for example, a time zone from 11:00 pm to 2 am can be considered. In addition, when the control unit 100 estimates a time zone in which the user 9 is highly likely to be present indoors based on position information acquired by the reception unit 140, the network name is estimated in the estimated time zone. It may be determined whether or not is received. In step s25, when the control unit 100 determines that the wireless communication unit 110 has received a network name in a predetermined time zone, the control unit 100 executes step s23 and registers the network name in the storage unit 103 as a registered network name.
 また、図11に示されるように、登録処理においては、ステップs22の後にステップs25が実行されてもよい。図11の例では、ステップs22において、電子機器10が停止していると判定されるとステップs25が実行される。ステップs25において、所定の時間帯で無線通信部110がネットワーク名を受信したと判定されると、ステップs23において当該ネットワーク名が登録される。なお、ステップs22とステップs25の実行の順番は入れ替えられてもよい。 Also, as shown in FIG. 11, in the registration process, step s25 may be executed after step s22. In the example of FIG. 11, when it is determined in step s22 that the electronic device 10 is stopped, step s25 is executed. If it is determined in step s25 that the wireless communication unit 110 has received a network name in a predetermined time zone, the network name is registered in step s23. Note that the order of execution of steps s22 and s25 may be switched.
 図9~11に示されるように、ネットワーク名が電子機器10に自動的に登録されることによって、電子機器10の利便性が向上する。 As shown in FIGS. 9 to 11, the convenience of the electronic device 10 is improved by automatically registering the network name in the electronic device 10.
 <外部に通知が行われるまでの電子機器の一連の動作の例>
 図12は、電子機器10がその外部に通知を行うまでの当該電子機器10の動作の一例を示すフローチャートである。電子機器10は、図12に示される一連の処理を、定期的にあるいは不定期的に繰り返し実行する。
<Example of a series of operations of an electronic device until notification is made to the outside>
FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the operation of the electronic device 10 until the electronic device 10 notifies the outside. The electronic device 10 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 12 periodically or irregularly.
 図12に示されるように、ステップs31において、位置判定部430は、電子機器10が所定領域に位置するか否かを判定する。ステップs31において、電子機器10が所定領域に位置すると判定されると、ステップs32において、停止移動特定部410は停止移動特定を行う。ステップs31において、電子機器10が所定領域に位置すると判定されない場合には、ステップs31が再度実行される。 As shown in FIG. 12, in step s31, the position determination unit 430 determines whether or not the electronic device 10 is located in a predetermined area. If it is determined in step s31 that the electronic device 10 is located in the predetermined area, the stop movement specifying unit 410 performs stop movement specification in step s32. If it is not determined in step s31 that the electronic device 10 is located in the predetermined area, step s31 is executed again.
 ステップs32での停止移動特定において、ユーザ9が移動しており、その移動手段が「乗り物」であると特定されると、ステップs35において、通知決定部600は通知非実行を決定する。ユーザ9の移動手段が、自動車、電車及びバス等の乗り物である場合には、ユーザ9は車両6に対して安全である可能性が高いことから、車両6の運転者に対して警告を行う必要性に乏しいと言える。そこで、通知決定部600は、ユーザ9の移動手段が「乗り物」であると特定された場合には、電子機器10が外部に通知を行わないことを決定する。これにより、ユーザ9が車両6に対して安全である場合に、当該車両6の運転者があまり必要でない情報を受け取る可能性を低減することができる。よって、車両6の運転者が、あまり必要でない情報を受け取ることによる煩わしさを感じる可能性を低減することができる。ステップs35が実行されると、電子機器10はステップs31を再度実行して、以後同様に動作する。 In the stop movement specification at step s32, when the user 9 is moving and the movement means is specified as “vehicle”, the notification determination unit 600 determines non-execution of the notification at step s35. When the moving means of the user 9 is a vehicle such as an automobile, a train, and a bus, the user 9 is likely to be safe with respect to the vehicle 6, and therefore warns the driver of the vehicle 6. It can be said that there is little necessity. Accordingly, the notification determining unit 600 determines that the electronic device 10 does not notify the outside when the moving means of the user 9 is specified as a “vehicle”. Thereby, when the user 9 is safe with respect to the vehicle 6, possibility that the driver | operator of the said vehicle 6 will receive the information which is not so necessary can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the driver of the vehicle 6 feels bothered by receiving information that is not so necessary. When step s35 is executed, the electronic device 10 executes step s31 again and thereafter operates in the same manner.
 ステップs32での停止移動特定において、ユーザ9が移動しており、その移動手段が「走り」であると特定される場合には、ステップs34が実行される。また停止移動特定において、ユーザ9が移動しており、その移動手段が「自転車」であると特定される場合には、ステップs34が実行される。ステップs34では、通知決定部600は通知実行を決定する。ユーザ9の移動手段が「走り」及び「自転車」である場合には、ユーザ9が車両6に対して安全であるとは言い難い。そこで、通知決定部600は、ユーザ9の移動手段が「走り」あるいは「自転車」であると特定された場合には、電子機器10が外部に通知を行うことを決定する。ステップs34が実行されると、電子機器10は再度ステップs31を実行して、以後同様に動作する。 In the stop movement specification at step s32, when the user 9 is moving and the movement means is specified as “running”, step s34 is executed. In the stop movement specification, when the user 9 is moving and the moving means is specified as “bicycle”, step s34 is executed. In step s34, the notification determination unit 600 determines notification execution. When the moving means of the user 9 are “running” and “bicycle”, it is difficult to say that the user 9 is safe with respect to the vehicle 6. Therefore, the notification determining unit 600 determines that the electronic device 10 notifies the outside when the moving means of the user 9 is specified as “running” or “bicycle”. When step s34 is executed, the electronic apparatus 10 executes step s31 again and thereafter operates in the same manner.
 通知決定部600が通知実行を決定すると、例えば、上記のような存在通知情報が無線通信部110から路側機5に通知される。路側機5は受け取った存在通知情報を所定領域に存在する車両6に対して通知する。ステップs31において電子機器10が例えばT字路領域に存在すると判定されると、当該T字路領域に設けられた路側機5は、電子機器10から受け取った存在通知情報を、当該T字路領域に存在する車両6に対して通知する。車両6は、受け取った存在通知情報に基づいて、運転者に対して警告を行う。なお、存在通知情報は、T字路領域に存在する車両6に対して電子機器10から直接通知されてもよい。 When the notification determination unit 600 determines the notification execution, for example, the presence notification information as described above is notified from the wireless communication unit 110 to the roadside device 5. The roadside device 5 notifies the received presence notification information to the vehicle 6 existing in the predetermined area. If it is determined in step s31 that the electronic device 10 is present in, for example, the T-junction region, the roadside machine 5 provided in the T-junction region uses the presence notification information received from the electronic device 10 as the T-junction region. Is notified to the vehicle 6 existing in the vehicle. The vehicle 6 warns the driver based on the received presence notification information. The presence notification information may be directly notified from the electronic device 10 to the vehicle 6 existing in the T-junction region.
 ステップs32での停止移動特定において、ユーザ9が停止していることが特定されると、ステップs33において、制御部100は、屋内特定部420での直近の屋内特定において「屋内」と判定されたか否かを確認する。また停止移動特定において、ユーザ9が移動しており、その移動手段が「歩き」であると特定されると、ステップs33において、制御部100は、屋内特定部420での直近の屋内特定において「屋内」と判定されたか否かを確認する。 In the stop movement specification in step s32, when it is specified that the user 9 is stopped, in step s33, is the control unit 100 determined to be “indoor” in the latest indoor specification in the indoor specification unit 420? Confirm whether or not. In the stop movement specification, when the user 9 is moving and the moving means is specified as “walking”, the control unit 100 performs “ Check if it is determined to be “indoor”.
 ステップs33において、直近の屋内特定で「屋内」と判定されたことが確認されると、ステップs35が実行されて通知非実行が決定される。ユーザ9がビル等の建物の中に存在する場合には、ユーザ9が車両6に対して安全である可能性が高い。したがって、直近の屋内特定で「屋内」と判定されている場合には、電子機器10が外部に通知を行わないことが決定される。 In step s33, if it is confirmed that the latest indoor identification is determined as “indoor”, step s35 is executed and notification non-execution is determined. When the user 9 exists in a building such as a building, there is a high possibility that the user 9 is safe with respect to the vehicle 6. Therefore, when it is determined as “indoor” in the latest indoor identification, it is determined that the electronic device 10 does not notify the outside.
 一方で、ステップs33において、直近の屋内特定で「屋内」と判定されていないことが確認されると、ステップs34が実行されて通知実行が決定される。ユーザ9が屋内に存在するか否かが不明の場合には、ユーザ9が車両6に対して安全であるとは言い難い。したがって、直近の屋内特定で「屋内」と判定されていない場合には、電子機器10が外部に通知を行うことが決定される。 On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step s33 that it is not determined to be “indoor” by the latest indoor identification, step s34 is executed and notification execution is determined. When it is unknown whether the user 9 is indoors, it is difficult to say that the user 9 is safe with respect to the vehicle 6. Therefore, when it is not determined as “indoor” in the latest indoor identification, it is determined that the electronic device 10 notifies the outside.
 なおステップs35の代わりに、通知決定部600は通知実行を決定してもよい。この場合には、例えば、近くに存在するユーザ9が車道に飛び出す危険性が低いことを通知するための通知情報が、電子機器10から、路側機5を介してあるいは直接車両6に通知されてもよい。 Note that instead of step s35, the notification determination unit 600 may determine to execute notification. In this case, for example, notification information for notifying that there is a low risk that the user 9 existing nearby will jump out on the roadway is notified from the electronic device 10 to the vehicle 6 via the roadside device 5 or directly. Also good.
 また図13に示されるように、ステップs32の停止移動特定が実行されなくてもよい。この場合には、ステップs31において電子機器10が所定領域に存在すると判定されると、ステップs33が実行される。 Further, as shown in FIG. 13, the stop movement identification in step s32 may not be executed. In this case, if it is determined in step s31 that the electronic device 10 is present in the predetermined area, step s33 is executed.
 また図14に示されるように、ステップs31が実行されなくてもよい。図14の例では、図13のフローにおいてステップs31が実行されていないが、図12のフローにおいてステップs31が実行されなくてもよい。この場合には、ステップs34が実行されるとステップs32が再度実行され、ステップs35が実行されるとステップs32が再度実行される。 As shown in FIG. 14, step s31 may not be executed. In the example of FIG. 14, step s31 is not executed in the flow of FIG. 13, but step s31 may not be executed in the flow of FIG. In this case, when step s34 is executed, step s32 is executed again, and when step s35 is executed, step s32 is executed again.
 また図15に示されるように、ステップs38の後に、ステップs31が実行されてもよい。ステップs38では、制御部100は、直近の屋内特定の結果を確認する。ステップs31において、電子機器10が所定領域に位置すると判定されると、ステップs39において、通知決定部600は、ステップs38で確認した結果に基づいて、電子機器10が外部に通知を行うか否かを決定する決定処理を行う。ステップs39において、通知決定部600は、直近の屋内特定において「屋内」と判定されている場合には、通知非実行を決定する。また通知決定部600は、直近の屋内特定において「屋内」と判定されていない場合には、通知実行を決定する。 Further, as shown in FIG. 15, step s31 may be executed after step s38. In step s38, the control unit 100 confirms the latest indoor specific result. If it is determined in step s31 that the electronic device 10 is located in the predetermined area, in step s39, the notification determination unit 600 determines whether or not the electronic device 10 notifies the outside based on the result confirmed in step s38. A determination process is performed to determine In step s39, when it is determined as “indoor” in the latest indoor identification, the notification determination unit 600 determines not to execute notification. In addition, the notification determination unit 600 determines the notification execution when “indoor” is not determined in the latest indoor identification.
 なお図15の例では、停止移動特定が行われていないが、ステップs31の前に停止移動特定が行われてもよい。この場合には、ステップs39において、通知決定部600は、停止移動特定の結果及びステップs38での確認の結果に基づいて、電子機器10が外部に通知を行うか否かを決定する。例えば、通知決定部600は、停止移動特定で移動手段が「乗り物」であると特定された場合には、通知非実行を決定する。また通知決定部600は、直近の屋内特定において「屋内」と判定されている場合には、通知非実行を決定する。また通知決定部600は、停止移動特定で移動手段が「走り」であると特定された場合には、通知実行を決定する。また通知決定部600は、停止移動特定で移動手段が「自転車」であると特定された場合には、通知実行を決定する。また通知決定部600は、停止移動特定で移動手段が「歩き」であると特定され、かつ直近の屋内特定において「屋内」と判定されていない場合には、通知実行を決定する。そして、通知決定部600は、停止移動特定でユーザ9が停止していることが特定され、かつ直近の屋内特定において「屋内」と判定されていない場合には、通知実行を決定する。 In the example of FIG. 15, stop movement identification is not performed, but stop movement identification may be performed before step s31. In this case, in step s39, the notification determination unit 600 determines whether or not the electronic device 10 makes a notification to the outside based on the result of specifying stop movement and the result of confirmation in step s38. For example, the notification determining unit 600 determines not to execute notification when the moving means is specified as a “vehicle” in the stop movement specification. Further, the notification determining unit 600 determines not to execute notification when it is determined as “indoor” in the latest indoor identification. Further, the notification determining unit 600 determines the notification execution when the moving means is specified as “running” in the stop movement specification. Further, the notification determining unit 600 determines the notification execution when the moving means is specified as “bicycle” in the stop movement specification. Further, the notification determining unit 600 determines the notification execution when the moving means is specified as “walking” in the stop movement specification and it is not determined as “indoor” in the latest indoor specification. Then, the notification determination unit 600 determines the notification execution when it is determined that the user 9 is stopped by the stop movement specification and it is not determined “indoor” in the latest indoor specification.
 以上のように、通知決定部600は、屋内特定の結果に基づいて、電子機器10が外部に通知を行うか否かを決定するため、電子機器10が外部にあまり必要のない通知を行う可能性を低減することができる。よって、電子機器10の利便性が向上する。 As described above, the notification determination unit 600 determines whether or not the electronic device 10 makes a notification to the outside based on the indoor specific result, so that the electronic device 10 can make a notification that is not necessary to the outside. Can be reduced. Therefore, the convenience of the electronic device 10 is improved.
 また図12、図13及び図15の例などでは、通知決定部600が、電子機器10が所定領域に位置する場合に決定処理を行い、電子機器10が所定領域に位置しない場合には決定処理を行わないため、電子機器10は必要なときに電子機器10が外部に通知を行うか否かを決定することができる。 In the examples of FIGS. 12, 13, and 15, the notification determination unit 600 performs determination processing when the electronic device 10 is located in a predetermined area, and determination processing when the electronic device 10 is not located in the predetermined area. Therefore, the electronic device 10 can determine whether or not the electronic device 10 notifies the outside when necessary.
 また上記の例では、電子機器10がITSで使用されることを前提に電子機器10の動作について説明したが、電子機器10の使用用途はこれに限られない。電子機器10は、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することを特定する必要のある用途であれば、どのような用途にも使用することができる。 In the above example, the operation of the electronic device 10 has been described on the assumption that the electronic device 10 is used in ITS, but the usage application of the electronic device 10 is not limited thereto. The electronic device 10 can be used for any application as long as it is necessary to specify that the user 9 is present indoors.
 <その他の例>
 次に電子機器10のその他の複数の例について説明する。
<Other examples>
Next, a plurality of other examples of the electronic device 10 will be described.
 <第1の例>
 上述の図7に示される建物700の外側にユーザ9が存在する場合であっても、電子機器10は、建物700内のアクセスポイントからネットワーク名を受信することができる場合がある。したがって、屋内特定において、ユーザ9が屋内に存在しないにもかかわらず「屋内」と判定される可能性がある。図16には、建物700の外側に存在するユーザ9が所持する電子機器10が、建物700内のアクセスポイント801からのネットワーク名を受信することができる様子が示されている。図16の例では、電子機器10がアクセスポイント801から受信するネットワーク名と、登録ネットワーク名とが一致することから、屋内特定では、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると誤って判定される。
<First example>
Even when the user 9 exists outside the building 700 shown in FIG. 7 described above, the electronic apparatus 10 may be able to receive a network name from an access point in the building 700. Therefore, in the indoor identification, there is a possibility that the user 9 is determined to be “indoor” even though the user 9 does not exist indoors. FIG. 16 shows a state where the electronic device 10 possessed by the user 9 existing outside the building 700 can receive the network name from the access point 801 in the building 700. In the example of FIG. 16, since the network name received by the electronic device 10 from the access point 801 matches the registered network name, it is erroneously determined that the user 9 is present indoors in indoor identification.
 一方で、建物700内にユーザ9が存在する場合には、建物700の外側にユーザ9が存在する場合と比較して、電子機器10がネットワーク名を受信する際の受信強度が大きくなる可能性が高い。 On the other hand, when the user 9 exists in the building 700, the reception intensity when the electronic device 10 receives the network name may be higher than when the user 9 exists outside the building 700. Is expensive.
 そこで、本例では、屋内特定部420は、識別情報判定部500での判定結果だけではなく、受信ネットワーク名の受信強度に基づいて、屋内特定を行う。図17は本例に係る屋内特定関連処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。 Therefore, in this example, the indoor identification unit 420 performs indoor identification based not only on the determination result of the identification information determination unit 500 but also on the reception strength of the reception network name. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the indoor identification related process according to this example.
 図17に示されるように、制御部100は上述のステップs1及びステップs2を実行する。ステップs2において、受信ネットワーク名と登録ネットワーク名とが一致すると判定されると、ステップs41において、屋内特定部420は、ステップs1で受信された受信ネットワーク名の受信強度がしきい値以上であるか否かを判定する。 As shown in FIG. 17, the control unit 100 executes the above-described steps s1 and s2. If it is determined in step s2 that the received network name matches the registered network name, in step s41, the indoor identifying unit 420 determines whether the reception strength of the received network name received in step s1 is greater than or equal to a threshold value. Determine whether or not.
 ここで、無線通信部110は、当該無線通信部110で受信する信号の受信強度を求めることができる。無線通信部110が求める受信強度としては、例えばRSSI(Received Signal Strength Indicator)が挙げられる。屋内特定部420は、無線通信部110で求められる、受信ネットワーク名を含む受信信号の受信強度、つまり、当該受信ネットワーク名の受信強度が、しきい値以上であるか否かを判定する。 Here, the wireless communication unit 110 can obtain the reception strength of the signal received by the wireless communication unit 110. Examples of the reception strength required by the wireless communication unit 110 include RSSI (Received Signal Signal Strength Indicator). The indoor identification unit 420 determines whether the reception strength of the received signal including the reception network name, that is, the reception strength of the reception network name, which is obtained by the wireless communication unit 110, is equal to or higher than a threshold value.
 ステップs41において、受信ネットワーク名の受信強度がしきい値未満であると判定されると、言い換えれば、受信ネットワーク名の受信強度が小さいと判定されると、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。一方で、受信ネットワーク名の受信強度がしきい値以上であると判定されると、言い換えれば、受信ネットワーク名の受信強度が大きいと判定されると、ステップs3が実行されて、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると判定される。その後、屋内特定処理が終了する。ある建物内のアクセスポイントからのネットワーク名を、当該ある建物内に存在するユーザ9が所持する電子機器10が受信する場合には、当該ネットワーク名の受信強度が大きくなる可能性が高い。一方で、ある建物内のアクセスポイントからのネットワーク名を、当該ある建物の外側に存在するユーザ9が所持する電子機器10が受信する場合には、当該ネットワーク名の受信強度が小さくなる可能性が高い。したがって、受信ネットワーク名と登録ネットワーク名とが一致、かつ当該受信ネットワーク名の受信強度が大きい場合に、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると判定することによって、より正しい屋内特定を行うことができる。 In step s41, if it is determined that the reception strength of the reception network name is less than the threshold value, in other words, if it is determined that the reception strength of the reception network name is low, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reception strength of the reception network name is equal to or higher than the threshold value, in other words, when it is determined that the reception strength of the reception network name is high, step s3 is executed, and the user 9 is indoors. Is determined to exist. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends. When the network device name from an access point in a building is received by the electronic device 10 possessed by the user 9 existing in the building, there is a high possibility that the reception strength of the network name will increase. On the other hand, when the electronic device 10 possessed by the user 9 existing outside the certain building receives the network name from the access point in the certain building, the reception strength of the network name may be reduced. high. Therefore, when the reception network name matches the registered network name and the reception strength of the reception network name is high, it is possible to perform more accurate indoor identification by determining that the user 9 is indoors.
 なお、ステップs41では、受信ネットワーク名の受信強度がしきい値よりも大きいか否かが判定されてもよい。この場合、受信ネットワーク名の受信強度がしきい値以下である場合、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。そして、受信ネットワーク名の受信強度がしきい値よりも大きい場合、ステップs3において「屋内」と判定される。 In step s41, it may be determined whether the reception strength of the reception network name is greater than a threshold value. In this case, when the reception strength of the reception network name is equal to or lower than the threshold value, the indoor identification related process ends. If the reception strength of the reception network name is greater than the threshold value, it is determined as “indoor” in step s3.
 また、ステップs41で使用されるしきい値は、電子機器10に登録するネットワーク名を受信する際の当該ネットワーク名の受信強度に基づいて決定してもよいし、他の基準で決定してもよい。 Further, the threshold value used in step s41 may be determined based on the reception strength of the network name when receiving the network name registered in the electronic device 10, or may be determined based on other criteria. Good.
 このように、本例では、屋内特定部420は、識別情報判定部500での判定結果と、受信ネットワーク名の受信強度とに基づいて、屋内特定を行うことから、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することをより正しく特定することができる。 Thus, in this example, the indoor identification unit 420 performs indoor identification based on the determination result of the identification information determination unit 500 and the reception strength of the reception network name, and thus the user 9 exists indoors. Can be specified more correctly.
 <第2の例>
 ネットワーク名の内容は変更可能であることから、登録ネットワーク名として登録された、屋内のアクセスポイントのネットワーク名が、屋外のアクセスポイントのネットワーク名と偶然に一致する可能性がある。したがって、ユーザ9が屋外に存在する場合であっても、受信ネットワーク名と登録ネットワーク名とが一致する可能性がある。よって、屋内特定において、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると誤って判定される可能性がある。
<Second example>
Since the contents of the network name can be changed, the network name of the indoor access point registered as the registered network name may coincide with the network name of the outdoor access point by chance. Therefore, even when the user 9 is outdoors, the reception network name and the registered network name may match. Therefore, in the indoor identification, there is a possibility that it is erroneously determined that the user 9 is present indoors.
 一方で、ある建物内に存在するアクセスポイントの位置は、当該ある建物内に存在する別のアクセスポイントの位置と近く、当該ある建物の外側に位置する別のアクセスポイントの位置とは遠い可能性が高い。したがって、ある建物内に存在するアクセスポイントからのネットワーク名を受信するときの電子機器10の位置は、当該ある建物内に存在する別のアクセスポイントからのネットワーク名を受信するときの電子機器10の位置と近く、当該ある建物の外側に位置する別のアクセスポイントからのネットワーク名を受信するときの電子機器10の位置とは遠い可能性が高い。 On the other hand, the location of an access point in a building may be close to the location of another access point in the building and far from the location of another access point located outside the building. Is expensive. Therefore, the position of the electronic device 10 when receiving a network name from an access point existing in a certain building is the position of the electronic device 10 when receiving a network name from another access point existing in the certain building. There is a high possibility that the electronic device 10 is far from the location when the network name from another access point located outside the certain building is received.
 そこで、本例では、識別情報判定部500での判定結果だけではなく、ネットワーク名を受信するときの電子機器10の位置を示す位置情報も使用されて、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することが特定される。以下に本例について詳細に説明する。 Therefore, in this example, not only the determination result in the identification information determination unit 500 but also the position information indicating the position of the electronic device 10 when receiving the network name is used to specify that the user 9 exists indoors. Is done. This example will be described in detail below.
 本例では、電子機器10に登録されるネットワーク名が無線通信部110で受信されるときの電子機器10の位置を示す位置情報が、登録位置情報として記憶部103に登録される。例えば、上述の図8のステップs12において、操作部210が登録指示操作を受け付けたときに受信部140で取得される位置情報が登録位置情報として記憶部103に登録される。また上述の図9~11に示される登録処理が実行される場合には、例えば、ステップs23が実行される際に受信部140で取得される位置情報が登録位置情報として記憶部103に登録される。例えば、上述の図7に示されるアクセスポイント803からのネットワーク名が記憶部103に登録される場合には、登録位置情報は、部屋721に存在する電子機器10の位置、言い換えれば、部屋721に存在するユーザ9の位置を示す。 In this example, position information indicating the position of the electronic device 10 when the wireless communication unit 110 receives a network name registered in the electronic device 10 is registered in the storage unit 103 as registered position information. For example, in step s12 of FIG. 8 described above, the position information acquired by the receiving unit 140 when the operation unit 210 receives a registration instruction operation is registered in the storage unit 103 as registered position information. When the registration process shown in FIGS. 9 to 11 is executed, for example, the position information acquired by the receiving unit 140 when step s23 is executed is registered in the storage unit 103 as registered position information. The For example, when the network name from the access point 803 shown in FIG. 7 described above is registered in the storage unit 103, the registered position information is stored in the position of the electronic device 10 in the room 721, in other words, in the room 721. The position of the existing user 9 is shown.
 本例では、記憶部103内の登録位置情報と、無線通信部110でネットワーク名が受信されるときの電子機器10の位置を示す位置情報とが比較され、その比較結果に基づいて、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することが特定される。 In this example, the registered position information in the storage unit 103 and the position information indicating the position of the electronic device 10 when the network name is received by the wireless communication unit 110 are compared. Based on the comparison result, the user 9 Is identified indoors.
 図18は本例に係る屋内特定関連処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。図18に示されるように、制御部100は上述のステップs1を実行する。ステップs1において、ネットワーク名が受信されたと判定されると、ステップs51において、制御部100は、受信部140から最新の位置情報を取得する。この位置情報は、ステップs1で受信されたネットワーク名が受信されるときの電子機器10の位置を示す位置情報であると言える。 FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the indoor identification related process according to this example. As illustrated in FIG. 18, the control unit 100 executes the above-described step s1. If it is determined in step s1 that the network name has been received, the control unit 100 acquires the latest position information from the reception unit 140 in step s51. This position information can be said to be position information indicating the position of the electronic device 10 when the network name received in step s1 is received.
 ステップs51の後、制御部100は、ステップs2を実行する。ステップs2において、受信ネットワーク名と登録ネットワーク名とが一致すると判定されると、ステップs52において、位置判定部430は、ステップs51で取得された位置情報が示す位置が、記憶部103内の登録位置情報が示す位置から所定範囲内に存在するか否かを判定する。言い換えれば、位置判定部430は、ステップs51で取得された位置情報が示す位置が、記憶部103内の登録位置情報が示す位置と近いか否かを判定する。ステップs52での所定範囲は、例えば、数m~10m程度に設定される。 After step s51, the control unit 100 executes step s2. If it is determined in step s2 that the received network name matches the registered network name, in step s52, the position determination unit 430 determines that the position indicated by the position information acquired in step s51 is the registered position in the storage unit 103. It is determined whether or not it exists within a predetermined range from the position indicated by the information. In other words, the position determination unit 430 determines whether or not the position indicated by the position information acquired in step s51 is close to the position indicated by the registered position information in the storage unit 103. The predetermined range in step s52 is set to about several m to 10 m, for example.
 ステップs52において、ステップs51で取得された位置情報が示す位置が、記憶部103内の登録位置情報が示す位置から所定範囲内に存在しないと判定されると、屋内判定関連処理が終了する。一方で、ステップs51で取得された位置情報が示す位置が、記憶部103内の登録位置情報が示す位置から所定範囲内に存在すると判定されると、ステップs3が実行されて、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると判定される。 If it is determined in step s52 that the position indicated by the position information acquired in step s51 does not exist within a predetermined range from the position indicated by the registered position information in the storage unit 103, the indoor determination related process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the position indicated by the position information acquired in step s51 is within a predetermined range from the position indicated by the registered position information in the storage unit 103, step s3 is executed, and the user 9 moves indoors. Is determined to exist.
 このように、本変形例では、受信ネットワーク名と登録ネットワーク名とが一致する場合であっても、当該受信ネットワーク名の受信時の電子機器10の位置が、当該登録ネットワークの受信時の電子機器10の位置から遠い場合には、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると判定されない。したがって、登録ネットワーク名として登録された、屋内のアクセスポイントのネットワーク名が、当該アクセスポイントとは離れた位置に存在する屋外のアクセスポイントのネットワーク名と偶然に一致する場合であっても、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると誤って判定される可能性を低減することができる。 As described above, in this modification, even when the reception network name matches the registered network name, the position of the electronic device 10 at the time of reception of the reception network name is the electronic device at the time of reception of the registration network. If it is far from the position 10, the user 9 is not determined to be present indoors. Therefore, even if the network name of the indoor access point registered as the registered network name coincides with the network name of the outdoor access point that is located away from the access point by chance, the user 9 It is possible to reduce the possibility of being erroneously determined to be present indoors.
 なお図19に示されるように、ステップs52の後に上述のステップs41が実行されてもよい。この場合には、ステップs52において、ステップs51で取得された位置情報が示す位置が、記憶部103内の登録位置情報が示す位置から所定範囲内に存在すると判定されると、ステップs41が実行される。そして、ステップs41において、ステップs1で受信された受信ネットワーク名の受信強度がしきい値以上であると判定されると、ステップs3が実行されて「屋内」と判定される。図19に示されるフローチャートにおいて、ステップs52とステップs41の実行順序は入れ替えられてもよい。 Note that, as shown in FIG. 19, step s41 described above may be executed after step s52. In this case, when it is determined in step s52 that the position indicated by the position information acquired in step s51 is within a predetermined range from the position indicated by the registered position information in the storage unit 103, step s41 is executed. The In step s41, if it is determined that the reception strength of the reception network name received in step s1 is greater than or equal to the threshold value, step s3 is executed to determine “indoor”. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 19, the execution order of step s52 and step s41 may be switched.
 このように、受信ネットワーク名と登録ネットワーク名とが一致し、当該受信ネットワーク名の受信時の電子機器10の位置が、当該登録ネットワークの受信時の電子機器10の位置と近く、当該受信ネットワーク名の受信強度が大きい場合に、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると判定することによって、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することをより正しく特定することができる。 Thus, the receiving network name and the registered network name match, and the position of the electronic device 10 when receiving the receiving network name is close to the position of the electronic device 10 when receiving the registered network, and the receiving network name By determining that the user 9 is present indoors when the reception strength of the user 9 is high, it is possible to more accurately specify that the user 9 is present indoors.
 また、登録位置情報は、登録されるネットワーク名を送信するアクセスポイントの位置を示す位置情報であってもよい。この場合には、例えば、上述の図7に示されるアクセスポイント803からのネットワーク名が記憶部103に登録される場合には、登録位置情報はアクセスポイント803の位置を示すことになる。 Further, the registered position information may be position information indicating the position of the access point that transmits the registered network name. In this case, for example, when the network name from the access point 803 shown in FIG. 7 is registered in the storage unit 103, the registered position information indicates the position of the access point 803.
 アクセスポイントと、その位置を示す位置情報とが対応付けられて登録されたデータベースを有するサーバ装置が存在する場合には、電子機器10は、当該サーバ装置から、登録するネットワーク名を送信するアクセスポイントの位置を示す位置情報を取得することができる。例えば、上述の図8のステップs12において、操作部210が登録指示操作を受け付けたときに、電子機器10は、登録指示操作によって指定される、登録するネットワーク名を送信するアクセスポイントの位置を示す位置情報を、サーバ装置から取得する。また、上述の図9~11に示される登録処理が実行される場合には、電子機器10は、例えは、ステップs23を実行する際に、登録するネットワーク名を送信するアクセスポイントの位置を示す位置情報を、サーバ装置から取得する。 When there is a server device having a database registered in association with an access point and location information indicating the location, the electronic device 10 transmits the network name to be registered from the server device. The position information indicating the position of can be acquired. For example, when the operation unit 210 receives a registration instruction operation in step s12 of FIG. 8 described above, the electronic device 10 indicates the position of the access point that transmits the network name to be registered, which is designated by the registration instruction operation. Position information is acquired from the server device. When the registration process shown in FIGS. 9 to 11 is executed, the electronic device 10 indicates the position of the access point that transmits the network name to be registered, for example, when executing step s23. Position information is acquired from the server device.
 また、アクセスポイントが、ネットワーク名とともに、当該アクセスポイントの位置を示す位置情報を送信する場合には、電子機器10は、登録するネットワーク名を受信するときに、当該ネットワーク名を送信するアクセスポイントの位置を示す位置情報を取得することができる。 When the access point transmits the location information indicating the location of the access point together with the network name, when the electronic device 10 receives the network name to be registered, the electronic device 10 transmits the network name of the access point. Position information indicating the position can be acquired.
 また、ステップs51で取得される位置情報は、受信ネットワーク名を送信するアクセスポイントの位置を示す位置情報であってもよい。上記のようなデータベースを有するサーバ装置が存在する場合には、電子機器10は、当該サーバ装置から、受信ネットワーク名を送信するアクセスポイントの位置を示す位置情報を取得することができる。また、アクセスポイントが、ネットワーク名とともに、当該アクセスポイントの位置を示す位置情報を送信する場合には、電子機器10は、受信ネットワーク名を受信するときに、当該受信ネットワーク名を送信するアクセスポイントの位置を示す位置情報を取得することができる。 Further, the location information acquired in step s51 may be location information indicating the location of the access point that transmits the reception network name. When there is a server apparatus having the database as described above, the electronic device 10 can acquire position information indicating the position of the access point that transmits the reception network name from the server apparatus. Further, when the access point transmits the location information indicating the location of the access point together with the network name, the electronic device 10 receives the network name of the access point that transmits the reception network name. Position information indicating the position can be acquired.
 なお、登録位置情報は、登録されるネットワーク名を送信するアクセスポイントの位置を示す位置情報であって、ステップs51で取得される位置情報は、受信ネットワーク名の受信時の電子機器10の位置を示す位置情報であってもよい。また、登録位置情報は、登録するネットワーク名の受信時の電子機器10の位置を示す位置情報であって、ステップs51で取得される位置情報は、受信ネットワーク名を送信するアクセスポイントの位置を示す位置情報であってもよい。アクセスポイントの位置と、当該アクセスポイントからネットワーク名を受信する電子機器10の位置とは互いに近いことから、登録位置情報の種類と、ステップs51で取得される位置情報の種類とが、このように互いに異なっていてもよい。 The registered location information is location information indicating the location of the access point that transmits the registered network name, and the location information acquired in step s51 indicates the location of the electronic device 10 when receiving the received network name. The positional information shown may be sufficient. The registered position information is position information indicating the position of the electronic device 10 when receiving the network name to be registered, and the position information acquired in step s51 indicates the position of the access point that transmits the received network name. It may be position information. Since the position of the access point and the position of the electronic device 10 that receives the network name from the access point are close to each other, the type of registered position information and the type of position information acquired in step s51 are as described above. They may be different from each other.
 <第3の例>
 上述のように、建物の外側にユーザ9が存在する場合であっても、電子機器10は、建物700のアクセスポイントからネットワーク名を受信することができる場合がある。したがって、屋内特定において、ユーザ9が屋内に存在しないにもかかわらず「屋内」と判定される可能性がある。
<Third example>
As described above, even when the user 9 exists outside the building, the electronic device 10 may be able to receive the network name from the access point of the building 700. Therefore, in the indoor identification, there is a possibility that the user 9 is determined to be “indoor” even though the user 9 does not exist indoors.
 一方で、ユーザ9は、自宅などの建物の中に存在する場合には、電子機器10を所持せずに机等に置く可能性がある。 On the other hand, if the user 9 is present in a building such as a home, the user 9 may place the electronic device 10 on a desk or the like without having the electronic device 10.
 そこで、本変形例に係る電子機器10は、当該電子機器10がユーザ9に所持されずに置かれているか否かを判定し、その判定結果と、識別情報判定部500での判定結果とに基いて、屋内特定を行う。以下に本変形例について詳細に説明する。 Therefore, the electronic device 10 according to the present modification determines whether or not the electronic device 10 is placed without being held by the user 9, and determines the determination result and the determination result in the identification information determination unit 500. Based on the indoor identification. This modification will be described in detail below.
 電子機器10が停止している状態には、電子機器10を所持するユーザが停止していることにより電子機器10が停止している第1の状態と、電子機器10がユーザに所持されずに机等に置かれていることにより停止している第2の状態とが含まれる。以後、第1の状態を「第1停止状態」と呼び、第2の状態を「第2停止状態」と呼ぶ。 The state in which the electronic device 10 is stopped includes the first state in which the electronic device 10 is stopped because the user who owns the electronic device 10 is stopped, and the electronic device 10 is not held by the user. And a second state that is stopped by being placed on a desk or the like. Hereinafter, the first state is referred to as “first stop state”, and the second state is referred to as “second stop state”.
 ユーザが停止している状態であるとしても、ユーザの動きが完全に止まることはほとんどないことから、第1停止状態の電子機器10の位置及び姿勢は少しは変化する。一方で、電子機器10がユーザによって所持されておらず、机等に置かれている場合には、電子機器10の位置及び姿勢はほとんど変化しない。 Even if the user is in a stopped state, the user's movement hardly stops completely, so the position and posture of the electronic device 10 in the first stopped state slightly change. On the other hand, when the electronic device 10 is not possessed by the user and is placed on a desk or the like, the position and posture of the electronic device 10 hardly change.
 上記の例では、停止移動特定部410が、電子機器10が第1停止状態であるのか、第2停止状態であるのかを特に区別せずに、電子機器10が停止しているか否かを判定していた。本変形例では、停止移動特定部410は、電子機器10が第1停止状態であるのか否かと、第2停止状態であるか否かとを区別して判定することができる。 In the above example, the stop movement specifying unit 410 determines whether or not the electronic device 10 is stopped without particularly distinguishing whether the electronic device 10 is in the first stop state or the second stop state. Was. In the present modification, the stop movement specifying unit 410 can distinguish and determine whether or not the electronic device 10 is in the first stop state and whether or not the electronic device 10 is in the second stop state.
 停止特定部410は、例えば、加速度センサ200で検出される加速度の時間変化パターン(以後、加速度パターンと呼ぶことがある)に基づいて、電子機器10が第1停止状態であるのか否かと、第2停止状態であるのか否かとを区別して判定することができる。 For example, the stop specifying unit 410 determines whether or not the electronic device 10 is in the first stop state based on a time change pattern of acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as an acceleration pattern). Whether it is 2 stop states or not can be distinguished and determined.
 ここで、上述のように、電子機器10が第1停止状態である場合と、電子機器10が第2停止状態である場合とでは、電子機器10の位置及び姿勢の変化の態様が互いに異なる。したがって、電子機器10が第1停止状態である場合の加速度パターンと、電子機器1が第2停止状態である場合の加速度パターンとは互いに異なるようになる。 Here, as described above, when the electronic device 10 is in the first stop state and when the electronic device 10 is in the second stop state, the changes in the position and orientation of the electronic device 10 are different from each other. Therefore, the acceleration pattern when the electronic device 10 is in the first stop state and the acceleration pattern when the electronic device 1 is in the second stop state are different from each other.
 本例では、記憶部103には、電子機器10が第1停止状態である場合に加速度センサ200で検出される加速度の時間変化パターンが第1基準パターンとして予め記憶されている。また、記憶部103には、電子機器10が第2停止状態である場合に加速度センサ200で検出される加速度の時間変化パターンが第2基準パターンとして予め記憶されている。停止移動特定部410は、加速度センサ200の検出結果から得られる加速度パターンが第1基準パターンに一致する場合には、電子機器10が第1停止状態であると判定する。一方で、停止移動特定部410は、加速度パターンが第1基準パターンに一致しない場合には、電子機器1が第1停止状態でないと判定する。また、停止移動特定部410は、加速度パターンが第2基準パターンに一致する場合には、電子機器10が第2停止状態であると判定する。一方で、停止移動特定部410は、加速度パターンが第2基準パターンに一致しない場合には、電子機器10が第2停止状態でないと判定する。 In this example, in the storage unit 103, a time change pattern of acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200 when the electronic device 10 is in the first stop state is stored in advance as a first reference pattern. The storage unit 103 stores in advance a time change pattern of acceleration detected by the acceleration sensor 200 when the electronic device 10 is in the second stop state as a second reference pattern. When the acceleration pattern obtained from the detection result of the acceleration sensor 200 matches the first reference pattern, the stop movement specifying unit 410 determines that the electronic device 10 is in the first stop state. On the other hand, when the acceleration pattern does not match the first reference pattern, the stop movement specifying unit 410 determines that the electronic device 1 is not in the first stop state. Moreover, the stop movement specific | specification part 410 determines with the electronic device 10 being a 2nd stop state, when an acceleration pattern corresponds to a 2nd reference pattern. On the other hand, when the acceleration pattern does not match the second reference pattern, the stop movement specifying unit 410 determines that the electronic device 10 is not in the second stop state.
 図20は本例に係る屋内特定関連処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。図20に示されるように、制御部100は上述のステップs1及びステップs2を実行する。ステップs2において、受信ネットワーク名と登録ネットワーク名とが一致すると判定されると、ステップs61において、停止移動特定410は、加速度センサ200から加速度を取得する。そして、ステップs62において、停止移動特定部410は、取得した加速度に基づいて、ステップs1においてネットワーク名が受信されてから所定期間内において電子機器10が第2停止状態になった否かを判定する。停止移動特定部410は、電子機器1が第2停止状態であるか否かを判定する状態判定処理を、ステップs1においてネットワーク名が受信されてから所定期間内において繰り返し実行する。そして、停止移動特定部410は、状態判定処理において、電子機器1が第2停止状態であると判定すると、ステップs1においてネットワーク名が受信されてから所定時間内において電子機器1が第2停止状態になったと判定する。一方で、停止移動特定部410は、繰り返し行う状態判定処理において一度も電子機器1が第2停止状態であると判定しない場合には、ステップs1においてネットワーク名が受信されてから所定時間内において電子機器1が第2停止状態になるということがなかったと判定する。 FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the indoor identification related process according to this example. As shown in FIG. 20, the control unit 100 executes the above-described steps s1 and s2. If it is determined in step s2 that the received network name matches the registered network name, the stop movement specification 410 acquires acceleration from the acceleration sensor 200 in step s61. In step s62, the stop movement specifying unit 410 determines, based on the acquired acceleration, whether or not the electronic device 10 is in the second stop state within a predetermined period after the network name is received in step s1. . The stop movement specifying unit 410 repeatedly executes a state determination process for determining whether or not the electronic device 1 is in the second stop state within a predetermined period after the network name is received in step s1. If the stop movement specifying unit 410 determines in the state determination process that the electronic device 1 is in the second stop state, the electronic device 1 is in the second stop state within a predetermined time after the network name is received in step s1. It is determined that On the other hand, if the stop movement specifying unit 410 does not determine that the electronic device 1 is in the second stop state even once in the state determination process that is repeatedly performed, the stop movement specifying unit 410 receives the electronic information within a predetermined time after the network name is received in step s1. It is determined that the device 1 has never been in the second stop state.
 ステップs62においてNOと判定されると、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。一方で、ステップs62においてYESと判定されると、ステップs3が実行されて、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると判定される。その後、屋内特定処理が終了する。 If it is determined NO in step s62, the indoor identification related process is terminated. On the other hand, if it determines with YES in step s62, step s3 will be performed and it will be determined that the user 9 exists indoors. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
 このように、本例では、屋内特定部420は、識別情報判定部500での判定結果と、電子機器10が第2停止状態であるか否かの判定の結果とに基づいて屋内特定を行うことから、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することをより正しく特定することができる。以後、ステップs61及びステップs62から成る処理を「停止判定処理」と呼ぶことがある。 Thus, in this example, the indoor identification unit 420 performs indoor identification based on the determination result of the identification information determination unit 500 and the determination result of whether or not the electronic device 10 is in the second stop state. Therefore, it can be more correctly specified that the user 9 exists indoors. Hereinafter, the process composed of step s61 and step s62 may be referred to as “stop determination process”.
 なお本例のように、停止特定部410が、電子機器10が第1停止状態であるのか否かと、第2停止状態であるか否かとを区別して判定することができる場合には、上述の図9及び図11のステップs22では、電子機器10が第1停止状態であるのか否かが判定されてもよいし、電子機器10が第2停止状態であるのか否かが判定されてもよい。 Note that, as in this example, when the stop identifying unit 410 can determine whether the electronic device 10 is in the first stop state and whether it is in the second stop state, In step s22 of FIG.9 and FIG.11, it may be determined whether the electronic device 10 is a 1st stop state, and it may be determined whether the electronic device 10 is a 2nd stop state. .
 <第4の例>
 ユーザ9は、電子機器10を充電する場合には、自宅などの建物の中で電子機器10を充電する可能性が高い。
<Fourth example>
When charging the electronic device 10, the user 9 is highly likely to charge the electronic device 10 in a building such as a home.
 そこで、本例に係る電子機器10は、当該電子機器10が充電されているか否かを判定し、その判定結果と、識別情報判定部500での判定結果とに基いて、屋内特定を行う。以下に本例について詳細に説明する。 Therefore, the electronic device 10 according to this example determines whether or not the electronic device 10 is charged, and performs indoor identification based on the determination result and the determination result in the identification information determination unit 500. This example will be described in detail below.
 図21は本例に係る屋内特定関連処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。図21に示されるように、制御部100は上述のステップs1及びステップs2を実行する。ステップs2において、受信ネットワーク名と登録ネットワーク名とが一致すると判定されると、ステップs71において、制御部100は、電子機器10が充電されているか否かを判定する。つまり、制御部100は、電池230が充電されているか否かを判定する。制御部100は、例えば、電子機器器10が備える、充電器が接続されるコネクタの特定の端子の電圧あるいは電流を監視することによって、電池230が充電されているか否かを判定することができる。 FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of indoor identification related processing according to this example. As shown in FIG. 21, the control unit 100 executes the above-described steps s1 and s2. If it is determined in step s2 that the received network name matches the registered network name, in step s71, the control unit 100 determines whether or not the electronic device 10 is charged. That is, the control unit 100 determines whether or not the battery 230 is charged. For example, the control unit 100 can determine whether or not the battery 230 is charged by monitoring the voltage or current of a specific terminal of the connector to which the charger is connected, which is included in the electronic device 10. .
 ステップs71において電子機器10が充電されていないと判定されると、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。一方で、ステップs71において電子機器10が充電されていると判定されると、ステップs3が実行されて、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると判定される。その後、屋内特定処理が終了する。 If it is determined in step s71 that the electronic device 10 is not charged, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s71 that the electronic device 10 is charged, step s3 is executed and it is determined that the user 9 is present indoors. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
 このように、本例では、屋内特定部420は、識別情報判定部500での判定結果と、電子機器10が充電されているか否かの判定の結果とに基づいて屋内特定を行うことから、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することをより正しく特定することができる。以後、ステップs71の処理を「充電判定処理」と呼ぶことがある。 Thus, in this example, the indoor identification unit 420 performs indoor identification based on the determination result of the identification information determination unit 500 and the determination result of whether or not the electronic device 10 is charged. It can be specified more correctly that the user 9 exists indoors. Hereinafter, the process of step s71 may be referred to as “charging determination process”.
 <第5の例>
 ユーザ9の自宅などの建物の中には、Wifi等の無線LANあるいはBluetooth等を用いて無線通信することが可能な家電機器が存在することがある。このような家電機器は、スマート家電機器と呼ばれることがある。スマート家電機器としては、例えば、テレビジョン、冷蔵庫、ゲーム機、炊飯器、DVDレコーダー、掃除機、電子レンジ、オーブントースタ、扇風機、エア・コンディショナー、空気清浄機、加湿器、パーソナルコンピュータ、ファクシミリ及び照明器具等が考えられる。
<Fifth example>
In a building such as a home of the user 9, there may be a home electric appliance that can perform wireless communication using a wireless LAN such as WiFi or Bluetooth. Such home appliances are sometimes called smart home appliances. Smart home appliances include, for example, televisions, refrigerators, game machines, rice cookers, DVD recorders, vacuum cleaners, microwave ovens, oven toasters, electric fans, air conditioners, air purifiers, humidifiers, personal computers, facsimiles and lighting. An instrument etc. can be considered.
 ユーザ9が自宅などの建物の中に存在する場合には、電子機器10は、当該建物の中に存在するスマート家電機器からの情報を受信できる可能性が高い。 When the user 9 is present in a building such as a home, the electronic device 10 is highly likely to be able to receive information from a smart home appliance present in the building.
 そこで、本例に係る電子機器10は、識別情報判定部500での判定結果と、スマート家電機器から受信する情報とに基づいて、屋内特定を行う。以下に本例について詳細に説明する。 Therefore, the electronic device 10 according to this example performs indoor identification based on the determination result in the identification information determination unit 500 and information received from the smart home appliance. This example will be described in detail below.
 図22は本例に係る屋内特定関連処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。図22に示されるように、制御部100は上述のステップs1及びステップs2を実行する。ステップs2においてYESと判定されると、ステップs81において、屋内特定部420は、電子機器10が建物内のスマート家電機器と通信可能か否かを判定する。 FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of indoor identification related processing according to this example. As illustrated in FIG. 22, the control unit 100 executes the above-described steps s1 and s2. If it determines with YES in step s2, the indoor specific | specification part 420 will determine whether the electronic device 10 can communicate with the smart household appliances in a building in step s81.
 ステップs81において、電子機器10がスマート家電機器と通信可能であると判定されると、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。一方で、ステップs81において、電子機器10がスマート家電機器と通信可能ではないと判定されると、ステップs3が実行されて、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると判定される。その後、屋内特定処理が終了する。 If it is determined in step s81 that the electronic device 10 can communicate with the smart home appliance, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s81 that the electronic device 10 cannot communicate with the smart home appliance, step s3 is executed and it is determined that the user 9 is present indoors. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
 屋内特定部420は、様々な方法で、電子機器10がスマート家電機器と通信可能か否かを判定することができる。例えば、上述の図8と同様にして、建物内のスマート家電機器が送信する、BSSIDあるいはネットワーク名等の識別情報が、登録家電識別情報として電子機器10に登録される。屋内特定部420は、ステップs81において、無線通信部110が識別情報を受信すると、受信された識別情報が登録家電識別情報と一致するか否かを判定する。屋内特定部420は、両者が一致すると判定すると、電子機器1が建物内のスマート家電機器と通信可能であると判定する。一方で、屋内特定部420は、両者が一致しないと判定すると、電子機器1がスマート家電機器と通信可能ではないと判定する。 The indoor identification unit 420 can determine whether or not the electronic device 10 can communicate with the smart home appliance by various methods. For example, in the same manner as in FIG. 8 described above, identification information such as BSSID or network name transmitted by the smart home appliance in the building is registered in the electronic device 10 as registered home appliance identification information. When the wireless communication unit 110 receives the identification information in step s81, the indoor identification unit 420 determines whether or not the received identification information matches the registered home appliance identification information. If the indoor identification unit 420 determines that the two match, the indoor specifying unit 420 determines that the electronic device 1 can communicate with the smart home appliance in the building. On the other hand, if indoor specifying unit 420 determines that the two do not match, it determines that electronic device 1 cannot communicate with the smart home appliance.
 また、建物内において、自身が家電機器であることを通知する通知情報を送信するスマート家電機器が存在するとする。この場合には、屋内特定部420は、無線通信部110が当該通知情報を受信した場合には、電子機器10がスマート家電機器と通信可能であると判定することができる。 Also, it is assumed that there is a smart home appliance that transmits notification information for notifying that it is a home appliance in the building. In this case, the indoor identifying unit 420 can determine that the electronic device 10 can communicate with the smart home appliance when the wireless communication unit 110 receives the notification information.
 また、電子機器10が、建物内のスマート家電機器と予め通信することによって、当該スマート家電機器と通信接続するために必要な接続情報を記憶しているとする。この場合には、電子機器10が接続情報に基づいてスマート家電機器と通信接続した場合には、屋内特定部420は、電子機器10がスマート家電機器と通信可能であると判定してもよい。 Also, it is assumed that the electronic device 10 stores connection information necessary for communication connection with the smart home appliance by communicating with the smart home appliance in the building in advance. In this case, when the electronic device 10 communicates with the smart home appliance based on the connection information, the indoor identification unit 420 may determine that the electronic device 10 can communicate with the smart home appliance.
 このように、本例では、屋内特定部420は、識別情報判定部500での判定結果と、無線通信部110が家電機器から受信する情報とに基づいて、屋内特定を行うことから、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することをより正しく特定することができる。 As described above, in this example, the indoor specifying unit 420 performs indoor specifying based on the determination result of the identification information determining unit 500 and the information received by the wireless communication unit 110 from the home appliance, and thus the user 9 Can be more accurately identified as being present indoors.
 なお、スマート家電機器から、その電源がオンに設定されたことを示す電源オン情報を電子機器10が受信することができる場合には、当該電源オン情報が屋内特定で使用されてもよい。例えば、屋内特定部420は、ステップs81において、電源オン情報を、ステップs1でYESと判定されてから所定期間内に無線通信部110が受信したか否かを判定する。つまり、屋内特定部420は、電子機器10がネットワーク名を受信してから所定期間内に電源オン情報を無線通信部110が受信したか否かを判定する。屋内特定部420は、ステップs81において、無線通信部110が電源オン情報を受信したと判定すると、ステップs3を実行して「屋内」と判定する。一方で、ステップs81において、無線通信部110が電源オン情報を受信しないと判定されると、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。ユーザ9が自宅等の建物の中に入ると、当該建物内に存在する、テレビジョン、ゲーム機、エア・コンディショナー等のスマート家電機器の電源をオンにすることがある。電子機器10が、ステップs2においてYESと判定した後にスマート家電機器からの電源オン情報を受け取ったときに「屋内」と判定することによって、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することをより正しく特定することができる。 In addition, when the electronic device 10 can receive power-on information indicating that the power is set to ON from the smart home appliance, the power-on information may be used for indoor identification. For example, the indoor identification unit 420 determines whether or not the wireless communication unit 110 has received the power-on information in step s81 within a predetermined period after it is determined YES in step s1. That is, the indoor identifying unit 420 determines whether or not the wireless communication unit 110 has received the power-on information within a predetermined period after the electronic device 10 receives the network name. If the indoor specifying unit 420 determines in step s81 that the wireless communication unit 110 has received the power-on information, it executes step s3 and determines “indoor”. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s81 that the wireless communication unit 110 does not receive the power-on information, the indoor identification related process ends. When the user 9 enters a building such as a home, the smart home appliances such as a television, a game machine, and an air conditioner that are present in the building may be turned on. The electronic device 10 can more accurately specify that the user 9 is present indoors by determining “indoor” when receiving the power-on information from the smart home appliance after determining YES in step s2. it can.
 また、ドアを備えるスマート家電機器から、当該ドアが開けられたことを示す家電ドア開情報を電子機器10が受信することができる場合には、当該家電ドア開情報が屋内特定で使用されてもよい。例えば、屋内特定部420は、ステップs81において、家電ドア開情報を、ステップs1でYESと判定されてから所定期間内に無線通信部110が受信したか否かを判定する。屋内特定部420は、ステップs81において、無線通信部110が家電ドア開情報を受信したと判定すると、ステップs3を実行して「屋内」と判定する。一方で、ステップs81において、無線通信部110が家電ドア開情報を受信しないと判定されると、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。ユーザ9が自宅等の建物の中に入ると、当該建物内に存在する、冷蔵庫、電子レンジ及びオーブントースタ等の、ドアを有するスマート家電機器のドアを開けることがある。電子機器10が、ステップs2においてYESと判定した後にスマート家電機器からの家電ドア開情報を受け取ったときに「屋内」と判定することによって、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することをより正しく特定することができる。 In addition, when the electronic device 10 can receive the home appliance door opening information indicating that the door has been opened from the smart home appliance including the door, the home appliance door opening information may be used for indoor identification. Good. For example, the indoor identifying unit 420 determines whether or not the wireless communication unit 110 has received the home appliance door opening information within a predetermined period after it is determined YES in step s1 in step s81. When the indoor specifying unit 420 determines in step s81 that the wireless communication unit 110 has received the home appliance door opening information, the indoor specifying unit 420 executes step s3 and determines “indoor”. On the other hand, if it determines with the wireless communication part 110 not receiving household appliance door opening information in step s81, an indoor specific related process will be complete | finished. When the user 9 enters a building such as a home, the door of a smart home appliance having a door, such as a refrigerator, a microwave oven, and an oven toaster, existing in the building may be opened. More accurately specifying that the user 9 is present indoors by determining “indoor” when the electronic device 10 receives home appliance door opening information from the smart home appliance after determining YES in step s2. Can do.
 また、スマート家電機器には、当該スマート家電機器の周囲に存在する人を検出する人感センサを有するスマート家電機器がある。屋内特定部420は、ステップs81において、スマート家電機器から、それが有する人感センサが人を検出したことを示す検出情報を、ステップs1でYESと判定されてから所定期間内に無線通信部110が受信したか否かを判定してもよい。屋内特定部420は、ステップs81において、無線通信部110が検出情報を受信したと判定すると、ステップs3を実行して「屋内」と判定する。一方で、ステップs81において、無線通信部110が検出情報を受信しないと判定されると、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。このように、電子機器10が、ステップs2においてYESと判定した後にスマート家電機器からの検出情報を受け取ったときに「屋内」と判定することによって、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することをより正しく特定することができる。 Also, smart home appliances include smart home appliances having a human sensor that detects a person around the smart home appliance. In step s81, the indoor identification unit 420 detects, from the smart home appliance, the wireless communication unit 110 within a predetermined period of time after detecting YES in step s1 that the human sensor it has detected a person. It may be determined whether or not is received. If the indoor specifying unit 420 determines in step s81 that the wireless communication unit 110 has received the detection information, the indoor specifying unit 420 executes step s3 and determines “indoor”. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s81 that the wireless communication unit 110 does not receive the detection information, the indoor identification related process ends. As described above, when the electronic device 10 determines “indoor” when receiving the detection information from the smart home appliance after determining “YES” in step s2, the user 9 is more correctly identified as being indoors. can do.
 なお人感センサとして、例えば、可視光線あるいは赤外線等を利用した光学センサ、マイクロ波レーダ、ミリ波レーダ、カメラ用のイメージセンサ、大気中の匂い成分を検出する匂いセンサ、あるいは音を検出するマイクロホンなどが採用されてもよい。スマート家電機器は、人感センサが検出した値に基づいて、当該スマート家電機器の周囲に人が存在することを認識することができる。 As human sensors, for example, optical sensors using visible light or infrared rays, microwave radar, millimeter wave radar, image sensors for cameras, odor sensors for detecting odor components in the atmosphere, or microphones for detecting sound Etc. may be adopted. Based on the value detected by the human sensor, the smart home appliance can recognize that there is a person around the smart home appliance.
 また、スマート家電機器が照明器具であって、当該照明器具が有する発光部が点灯されたことを示す点灯情報を当該照明器具から電子機器10が受信することができる場合には、当該点灯情報が屋内特定で使用されてもよい。例えば、屋内特定部420は、ステップs81において、点灯情報を、ステップs1でYESと判定されてから所定期間内に無線通信部110が受信したか否かを判定する。屋内特定部420は、ステップs81において、無線通信部110が点灯情報を受信したと判定すると、ステップs3を実行して「屋内」と判定する。一方で、ステップs81において、無線通信部110が点灯情報を受信しないと判定されると、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。ユーザ9が自宅等の建物の中に入ると、当該建物内に存在する照明器具を点灯させる可能性が高い。電子機器10が、ステップs2においてYESと判定した後にスマート家電機器からの点灯情報を受け取ったときに「屋内」と判定することによって、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することをより正しく特定することができる。以後、ステップs81の処理を「家電関連判定処理」と呼ぶことがある。 Further, when the smart home appliance is a lighting fixture, and the electronic device 10 can receive lighting information indicating that the light emitting unit of the lighting fixture is turned on, the lighting information is It may be used indoors. For example, the indoor identifying unit 420 determines whether or not the wireless communication unit 110 has received the lighting information within a predetermined period of time after determining YES in step s1 in step s81. If the indoor specifying unit 420 determines in step s81 that the wireless communication unit 110 has received the lighting information, the indoor specifying unit 420 executes step s3 and determines “indoor”. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s81 that the wireless communication unit 110 does not receive the lighting information, the indoor identification related process ends. When the user 9 enters a building such as a home, there is a high possibility that the lighting equipment existing in the building is turned on. When the electronic device 10 determines “indoor” when receiving the lighting information from the smart home appliance after determining YES in step s2, it can be more correctly specified that the user 9 is present indoors. . Hereinafter, the process of step s81 may be referred to as a “home appliance related determination process”.
 <第6の例>
 ユーザ9が、自宅などの建物の中に入る場合には、その建物のドアの鍵を開ける可能性が高い。
<Sixth example>
When the user 9 enters a building such as a home, there is a high possibility that the door of the building is unlocked.
 そこで、本例に係る電子機器10は、建物のドアの鍵が開けられた否かを判定し、その判定結果と、識別情報判定部500での判定結果とに基いて、屋内特定を行う。以下に本例について詳細に説明する。 Therefore, the electronic device 10 according to this example determines whether or not the door of the building has been unlocked, and performs indoor identification based on the determination result and the determination result in the identification information determination unit 500. This example will be described in detail below.
 図23は本例に係る屋内特定関連処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。図23に示されるように、制御部100は上述のステップs1及びステップs2を実行する。ステップs2においてYESと判定されると、制御部100は、ステップs91において、ステップ1でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において建物のドアの鍵が開けられた否かを判定する。 FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of indoor identification related processing according to this example. As shown in FIG. 23, the control unit 100 executes the above-described steps s1 and s2. If it is determined YES in step s2, control unit 100 determines in step s91 whether the door of the building has been unlocked within a predetermined time after determining YES in step 1.
 ここで、本例では、建物には、そのドアの鍵の開閉を検出する鍵開閉センサが設けられている。この鍵開閉センサは、ドアの鍵が開けられると、それを示す鍵開情報を送信することが可能である。また鍵開閉センサは、ドアの鍵が閉められると、それを示す鍵閉情報を送信することが可能である。 Here, in this example, the building is provided with a key opening / closing sensor for detecting the opening / closing of the key of the door. When the door is unlocked, the key opening / closing sensor can transmit key opening information indicating the door. The key opening / closing sensor can transmit key closing information indicating that the door key is closed.
 制御部100は、ステップs91において、鍵開情報を、ステップs1でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において無線通信部110が受信すると、ステップs1でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において建物のドアの鍵が開けられたと判定する。一方で、制御部100は、鍵開情報を、ステップs1でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において無線通信部110が受信することがなかった場合、ステップs1でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において建物のドアの鍵が開けられることはなかったと判定する。 When the wireless communication unit 110 receives the key opening information in step s91 within a predetermined time after it is determined as YES in step s91, the control unit 100 determines the building information within the predetermined time after determining YES in step s1. It is determined that the door is unlocked. On the other hand, if the wireless communication unit 110 has not received the key opening information within a predetermined time after determining YES in step s1, the control unit 100 determines a predetermined time after determining YES in step s1. It is determined that the building door was not unlocked inside.
 ステップs91において建物のドアの鍵が開けられなかったと判定されると、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。一方で、ステップs91において建物のドアの鍵が開けられたと判定されると、ステップs3が実行されて、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると判定される。その後、屋内特定処理が終了する。 If it is determined in step s91 that the door of the building has not been unlocked, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s91 that the building door has been unlocked, step s3 is executed and it is determined that the user 9 is present indoors. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
 このように、本例では、屋内特定部420は、識別情報判定部500での判定結果と、建物のドアの鍵が開けられたか否かの判定の結果とに基づいて屋内特定を行うことから、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することをより正しく特定することができる。以後、ステップs91の処理を「鍵開判定処理」と呼ぶことがある。 Thus, in this example, the indoor identification unit 420 performs indoor identification based on the determination result of the identification information determination unit 500 and the determination result of whether or not the door of the building has been unlocked. The user 9 can be identified more accurately indoors. Hereinafter, the processing in step s91 may be referred to as “key opening determination processing”.
 なお図24に示されるように、制御部100は、ステップs91の後のステップs92において、ステップs91でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において建物のドアの鍵が閉められたか否かを判定してもよい。ステップs92では、制御部100は、鍵閉情報を、ステップs91でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において無線通信部110が受信すると、ステップs91でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において建物のドアの鍵が閉められたと判定する。一方で、制御部100は、鍵閉情報を、ステップs91でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において無線通信部110が受信することがなかった場合、ステップs91でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において建物のドアの鍵が閉められることはなかったと判定する。 As shown in FIG. 24, in step s92 after step s91, the control unit 100 determines whether or not the door of the building has been locked within a predetermined time after determining YES in step s91. May be. In step s92, when the wireless communication unit 110 receives the key closing information within a predetermined time after the determination of YES in step s91, the control unit 100 determines the building information within the predetermined time after determining YES in step s91. It is determined that the door is locked. On the other hand, if the wireless communication unit 110 has not received the key closing information within a predetermined time after determining YES in step s91, the control unit 100 determines a predetermined time after determining YES in step s91. It is determined that the building door has not been locked inside.
 ステップs92において建物のドアの鍵が閉められなかったと判定されると、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。一方で、ステップs92において建物のドアの鍵が閉められたと判定されると、ステップs3が実行されて、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると判定される。その後、屋内特定処理が終了する。 If it is determined in step s92 that the door of the building has not been closed, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s92 that the door of the building has been closed, step s3 is executed and it is determined that the user 9 is present indoors. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
 ユーザ9が、自宅などの建物の中に入る場合には、その建物のドアの鍵を開けた後に、当該鍵を閉める可能性が高い。したがって、ステップs91の後にステップs92が実行されることによって、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することをより正しく特定することができる。以後、ステップs91及びs92から成る処理を「鍵開閉判定処理」と呼ぶことがある。 When the user 9 enters a building such as a home, the user 9 is likely to close the lock after unlocking the door of the building. Therefore, by executing step s92 after step s91, it can be more correctly specified that the user 9 exists indoors. Hereinafter, the processing composed of steps s91 and s92 may be referred to as “key opening / closing determination processing”.
 また、屋内特定部420は、建物のドアの鍵が開けられたか否かの判定の結果の代わりに、建物のドアが開けられたか否かの判定の結果を用いてもよい。図25はこの場合の屋内特定関連処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。 Also, the indoor identification unit 420 may use the result of the determination as to whether or not the building door has been opened instead of the result of the determination as to whether or not the building door has been unlocked. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the indoor identification related process in this case.
 図25に示されるように、ステップs2においてYESと判定されると、制御部100は、ステップs101において、ステップ1でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において建物のドアが開けられた否かを判定する。 As shown in FIG. 25, when it is determined as YES in step s2, the control unit 100 determines whether or not the building door is opened within a predetermined time after it is determined as YES in step 1 in step s101. judge.
 ここで、図25の例では、建物には、そのドアの開閉を検出するドア開閉センサが設けられている。このドア開閉センサは、ドアが開けられると、それを示すドア開情報を送信することが可能である。またドア開閉センサは、ドアが閉められると、それを示すドア閉情報を送信することが可能である。 Here, in the example of FIG. 25, the building is provided with a door opening / closing sensor for detecting opening / closing of the door. When the door is opened, the door opening / closing sensor can transmit door opening information indicating the door. The door opening / closing sensor can transmit door closing information indicating that the door is closed.
 制御部100は、ステップs101において、ドア開情報を、ステップs1でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において無線通信部110が受信すると、ステップs1でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において建物のドアが開けられたと判定する。一方で、制御部100は、ドア開情報を、ステップs1でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において無線通信部110が受信することがなかった場合、ステップs1でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において建物のドアが開けられることはなかったと判定する。 When the wireless communication unit 110 receives the door opening information in step s101 within a predetermined time after it is determined as YES in step s101, the control unit 100 determines the building opening within the predetermined time after it is determined as YES in step s1. It is determined that the door has been opened. On the other hand, if the wireless communication unit 110 does not receive the door opening information within a predetermined time after determining YES in step s1, the control unit 100 determines a predetermined time after determining YES in step s1. It is determined that the building door was not opened inside.
 ステップs101において建物のドアが開けられなかったと判定されると、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。一方で、ステップs101において建物のドアが開けられたと判定されると、ステップs3が実行されて、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると判定される。その後、屋内特定処理が終了する。 If it is determined in step s101 that the door of the building has not been opened, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s101 that the building door has been opened, step s3 is executed, and it is determined that the user 9 is present indoors. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
 このように、屋内特定部420が、識別情報判定部500での判定結果と、建物のドアが開けられたか否かの判定の結果とに基づいて屋内特定を行う場合であっても、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することをより正しく特定することができる。以後、ステップs101の処理を「ドア開判定処理」と呼ぶことがある。 Thus, even if the indoor identification unit 420 performs indoor identification based on the determination result in the identification information determination unit 500 and the determination result on whether or not the door of the building has been opened, the user 9 Can be more accurately identified as being present indoors. Hereinafter, the processing in step s101 may be referred to as “door open determination processing”.
 なお図26に示されるように、制御部100は、ステップs101の後のステップs102において、ステップs101でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において建物のドアが閉められたか否かを判定してもよい。ステップs102では、制御部100は、ドア閉情報を、ステップs101でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において無線通信部110が受信すると、ステップs91でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において建物のドアが閉められたと判定する。一方で、制御部100は、ドア閉情報を、ステップs101でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において無線通信部110が受信することがなかった場合、ステップs101でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において建物のドアが閉められることはなかったと判定する。 As shown in FIG. 26, the control unit 100 determines whether or not the door of the building is closed within a predetermined time after determining YES in step s101 in step s102 after step s101. Good. In step s102, when the wireless communication unit 110 receives the door closing information within a predetermined time after determining YES in step s101, the control unit 100 determines that the building is closed within the predetermined time after determining YES in step s91. It is determined that the door is closed. On the other hand, if the wireless communication unit 110 does not receive the door closing information within a predetermined time after determining YES in step s101, the control unit 100 determines a predetermined time after determining YES in step s101. It is determined that the building door was never closed.
 ステップs102において建物のドアが閉められなかったと判定されると、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。一方で、ステップs102において建物のドアが閉められたと判定されると、ステップs3が実行されて、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると判定される。その後、屋内特定処理が終了する。 If it is determined in step s102 that the building door has not been closed, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step s102 that the building door is closed, step s3 is executed and it is determined that the user 9 is present indoors. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
 このように、ステップs101の後にステップs102が実行されることによって、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することをより正しく特定することができる。以後、ステップs101及びステップs102から成る処理を「ドア開閉判定処理」と呼ぶことがある。 Thus, by executing step s102 after step s101, it is possible to more correctly specify that the user 9 is present indoors. Hereinafter, the process composed of steps s101 and s102 may be referred to as “door opening / closing determination process”.
 <第7の例>
 ユーザ9が自宅等の建物の中に存在する場合には、当該建物の中の温度と、電子機器10の温度とが互いに近い値を示す可能性が高い。
<Seventh example>
When the user 9 is present in a building such as a home, the temperature in the building and the temperature of the electronic device 10 are likely to be close to each other.
 そこで、本例に係る電子機器10は、電子機器10の温度と、建物内の温度とを比較し、その比較結果と、識別情報判定部500での判定結果とに基いて、屋内特定を行う。以下に本例について詳細に説明する。 Therefore, the electronic device 10 according to this example compares the temperature of the electronic device 10 with the temperature in the building, and performs indoor identification based on the comparison result and the determination result in the identification information determination unit 500. . This example will be described in detail below.
 図27は本例に係る電子機器10の構成の一例を示す図である。図27に示されるように、本例に係る電子機器10は、上述の図4に示される電子機器10において、温度センサ250をさらに備えるものである。温度センサ250は、例えば機器ケース11内に位置している。温度センサ250は、電子機器10の温度を検出することが可能である。 FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the electronic device 10 according to the present example. As shown in FIG. 27, the electronic device 10 according to this example further includes a temperature sensor 250 in the electronic device 10 shown in FIG. 4 described above. The temperature sensor 250 is located, for example, in the device case 11. The temperature sensor 250 can detect the temperature of the electronic device 10.
 本例では、自宅等の建物内に、当該建物内の温度を検出することが可能な建物内温度センサが設けられている。建物内温度センサは、自身が検出する建物内の温度を送信することができる。なお、建物内温度センサは、エア・コンディショナー等のスマート家電機器に設けられてもよい。以後、電子機器10の温度センサ250で検出される温度を「第1温度」と呼ぶことがある。また、建物内温度センサで検出される温度を「第2温度」と呼ぶことがある。 In this example, an in-building temperature sensor capable of detecting the temperature in the building is provided in a building such as a home. The in-building temperature sensor can transmit the temperature in the building detected by itself. The building temperature sensor may be provided in a smart home appliance such as an air conditioner. Hereinafter, the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 250 of the electronic device 10 may be referred to as a “first temperature”. In addition, the temperature detected by the building temperature sensor may be referred to as a “second temperature”.
 図28は本例に係る屋内特定関連処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。図28に示されるように、制御部100は上述のステップs1及びステップs2を実行する。ステップs2においてYESと判定されると、制御部100は、ステップs111において、ステップs1でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において第2温度を無線通信部110が受信するか否かを判定する。 FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of indoor identification related processing according to this example. As shown in FIG. 28, the control unit 100 executes the above-described steps s1 and s2. If YES is determined in step s2, control unit 100 determines in step s111 whether wireless communication unit 110 receives the second temperature within a predetermined time after YES is determined in step s1.
 ステップs111において第2温度が無線通信部110で受信されないと判定されると、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。一方で、ステップs111において、第2温度が受信されたと判定されると、ステップs112において、制御部100は、温度センサ250で検出される第1温度と、無線通信部110が受信した第2温度とが、互いに近い値であるか否かを判定する。ステップs112では、制御部100は、まず、第1温度から第2温度を差し引いて得られる値の絶対値を求める。そして、制御部100は、求めた絶対値がしきい値以下である場合、第1及び第2温度が互いに近しい値であると判定する。一方で、制御部100は、求めた絶対値がしきい値よりも大きい場合、第1及び第2温度が互いに離れていると判定する。なお、制御部100は、求めた絶対値がしきい値未満である場合、第1及び第2温度が互いに近しい値であると判定し、求めた絶対値がしきい値以上である場合、第1及び第2温度が互いに離れていると判定してもよい。 If it is determined in step s111 that the second temperature is not received by the wireless communication unit 110, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step s111 that the second temperature has been received, in step s112, the control unit 100 detects the first temperature detected by the temperature sensor 250 and the second temperature received by the wireless communication unit 110. Are determined to be close to each other. In step s112, the control unit 100 first obtains an absolute value of a value obtained by subtracting the second temperature from the first temperature. And the control part 100 determines with the 1st and 2nd temperature being a mutually close value, when the calculated | required absolute value is below a threshold value. On the other hand, when the obtained absolute value is larger than the threshold value, the control unit 100 determines that the first and second temperatures are separated from each other. The controller 100 determines that the first and second temperatures are close to each other when the obtained absolute value is less than the threshold value, and when the obtained absolute value is equal to or greater than the threshold value, It may be determined that the first and second temperatures are separated from each other.
 ステップs112において、第1及び第2温度が互いに離れていると判定されると、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。一方で、第1及び第2温度が互いに近い値であると判定されると、ステップs3が実行されて、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると判定される。その後、屋内特定処理が終了する。 If it is determined in step s112 that the first and second temperatures are separated from each other, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first and second temperatures are close to each other, step s3 is executed and it is determined that the user 9 is present indoors. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
 このように、屋内特定部420が、識別情報判定部500での判定結果と、第1及び第2温度の比較の結果とに基づいて、屋内特定を行うため、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することをより正しく特定することができる。以後、ステップs111及びs112から成る処理を「温度判定処理」と呼ぶことがある。 Thus, since the indoor identification unit 420 performs indoor identification based on the determination result in the identification information determination unit 500 and the comparison result between the first and second temperatures, the user 9 exists indoors. Can be specified more correctly. Hereinafter, the process composed of steps s111 and s112 may be referred to as “temperature determination process”.
 なお電子機器10は、電子機器10の周囲の湿度と、建物内の湿度とを比較し、その比較結果と、識別情報判定部500での判定結果とに基づいて、屋内特定を行ってもよい。図29は、この場合の電子機器10の構成の一例を示す図である。また図30は、この場合の屋内特定関連処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。図29に示される電子機器10は、電子機器10の周囲の湿度を検出する湿度センサ260を備える。 The electronic device 10 may compare the humidity around the electronic device 10 with the humidity in the building, and may perform indoor identification based on the comparison result and the determination result in the identification information determination unit 500. . FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the electronic device 10 in this case. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the indoor identification related process in this case. The electronic device 10 shown in FIG. 29 includes a humidity sensor 260 that detects the humidity around the electronic device 10.
 図29及び図30の例では、自宅等の建物内に、当該建物内の湿度を検出することが可能な建物内湿度センサが設けられている。建物内湿度センサは、自身が検出する建物内の湿度を送信することが可能である。なお、建物内湿度センサは、エア・コンディショナーあるいは加湿器等のスマート家電機器に設けられてもよい。以後、電子機器10の湿度センサ260で検出される温度を「第1湿度」と呼ぶことがある。また、建物内湿度センサで検出される温度を「第2湿度」と呼ぶことがある。 29 and 30, an in-building humidity sensor capable of detecting the humidity in the building is provided in a building such as a home. The in-building humidity sensor can transmit the humidity in the building detected by itself. The in-building humidity sensor may be provided in a smart home appliance such as an air conditioner or a humidifier. Hereinafter, the temperature detected by the humidity sensor 260 of the electronic device 10 may be referred to as “first humidity”. In addition, the temperature detected by the in-building humidity sensor may be referred to as “second humidity”.
 図30に示されるように、制御部100は上述のステップs1及びステップs2を実行する。ステップs2においてYESと判定されると、制御部100は、ステップs121において、ステップs1でYESと判定されてから所定時間内において第2湿度を無線通信部110が受信するか否かを判定する。 As shown in FIG. 30, the control unit 100 executes the above-described steps s1 and s2. If YES is determined in step s2, control unit 100 determines in step s121 whether or not wireless communication unit 110 receives the second humidity within a predetermined time after determining YES in step s1.
 ステップs121において第2湿度が無線通信部110で受信されないと判定されると、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。一方で、ステップs111において、第2湿度が受信されたと判定されると、ステップs122において、制御部100は、湿度センサ260で検出される第1湿度と、無線通信部110が受信した第2湿度とが、互いに近い値であるか否かを判定する。ステップs122では、制御部100は、まず、第1湿度から第2湿度を差し引いて得られる値の絶対値を求める。そして、制御部100は、求めた絶対値がしきい値以下である場合、第1及び第2湿度が互いに近しい値であると判定する。一方で、制御部100は、求めた絶対値がしきい値よりも大きい場合、第1及び第2湿度が互いに離れていると判定する。なお、制御部100は、求めた絶対値がしきい値未満である場合、第1及び第2湿度が互いに近しい値であると判定し、求めた絶対値がしきい値以上である場合、第1及び第2湿度が互いに離れていると判定してもよい。 If it is determined in step s121 that the second humidity is not received by the wireless communication unit 110, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step s111 that the second humidity has been received, in step s122, the control unit 100 detects the first humidity detected by the humidity sensor 260 and the second humidity received by the wireless communication unit 110. Are determined to be close to each other. In step s122, the control unit 100 first obtains an absolute value of a value obtained by subtracting the second humidity from the first humidity. And the control part 100 determines with the 1st and 2nd humidity being a mutually close value, when the calculated | required absolute value is below a threshold value. On the other hand, the control unit 100 determines that the first and second humidity are separated from each other when the obtained absolute value is larger than the threshold value. The control unit 100 determines that the first and second humidity values are close to each other when the obtained absolute value is less than the threshold value, and if the obtained absolute value is equal to or greater than the threshold value, It may be determined that the first and second humidity are separated from each other.
 ステップs122において、第1及び第2湿度が互いに離れていると判定されると、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。一方で、第1及び第2湿度が互いに近い値であると判定されると、ステップs3が実行されて、ユーザ9が屋内に存在すると判定される。その後、屋内特定処理が終了する。 If it is determined in step s122 that the first and second humidity are separated from each other, the indoor identification related process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first and second humidity values are close to each other, step s3 is executed and it is determined that the user 9 is present indoors. Thereafter, the indoor identification process ends.
 このように、屋内特定部420が、識別情報判定部500での判定結果と、第1及び第2湿度の比較の結果とに基づいて、屋内特定を行うため、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することをより正しく特定することができる。以後、ステップs121及びステップs122から成る処理を「湿度判定処理」と呼ぶことがある。 As described above, since the indoor identification unit 420 performs indoor identification based on the determination result of the identification information determination unit 500 and the comparison result of the first and second humidity, the user 9 is present indoors. Can be specified more correctly. Hereinafter, the process composed of steps s121 and s122 may be referred to as “humidity determination process”.
 <第8の例>
 本例と後述の第9の例では、電子機器10のユーザ9が子供である場合を想定した当該電子機器10の動作について説明する。本例と第9の例では、ユーザ9を「子供9」と呼ぶ。
<Eighth example>
In this example and a ninth example described later, an operation of the electronic device 10 assuming that the user 9 of the electronic device 10 is a child will be described. In this example and the ninth example, the user 9 is called “child 9”.
 本例では、子供9の自宅内のアクセスポイントが送信するネットワーク名が登録ネットワーク名として電子機器10の記憶部103に登録される。そして、電子機器10は、「屋内」と判定すると、つまり、子供9が自宅内に存在すると判定すると、当該電子機器10に登録された登録機器に対して、子供9が帰宅したことを通知する。電子機器10の記憶部103には、例えば、登録機器に割り当てられたeメールアドレスが記憶されている。電子機器10では、屋内特定部420が「屋内」と判定すると、無線通信部110が、記憶部103内のeメールアドレスを利用して、登録機器に対して、子供9が帰宅したことを通知する通知情報を送信する。登録機器としては、例えば、子供9の両親が有する携帯電話機あるいは子供9の祖父母が有する携帯電話機が挙げられる。また複数の登録機器が電子機器10に登録されてもよい。 In this example, the network name transmitted by the access point in the home of the child 9 is registered in the storage unit 103 of the electronic device 10 as the registered network name. When the electronic device 10 determines “indoor”, that is, when it is determined that the child 9 is present at home, the electronic device 10 notifies the registered device registered in the electronic device 10 that the child 9 has returned home. . The storage unit 103 of the electronic device 10 stores e-mail addresses assigned to registered devices, for example. In the electronic device 10, when the indoor identification unit 420 determines “indoor”, the wireless communication unit 110 notifies the registered device that the child 9 has returned using the email address in the storage unit 103. Send notification information. Examples of the registered device include a mobile phone held by the parents of the child 9 or a mobile phone held by the grandparents of the child 9. A plurality of registered devices may be registered in the electronic device 10.
 このように、電子機器10が、「屋内」と判定すると、当該電子機器10の外部に通知を行うことによって、子供9の親等は、自宅にいない場合であっても、子供9が帰宅したことを知ることができる。よって、電子機器10の利便性が向上する。なお、ユーザ9が子供でない場合であっても、電子機器10は、「屋内」と判定すると、当該電子機器10の外部に通知を行ってもよい。 As described above, when the electronic device 10 determines “indoor”, the child 9 has returned home even if the parent of the child 9 is not at home by notifying the outside of the electronic device 10. Can know. Therefore, the convenience of the electronic device 10 is improved. Even when the user 9 is not a child, the electronic device 10 may notify the outside of the electronic device 10 when it is determined to be “indoor”.
 <第9の例>
 電子機器10の動作モードには、電子機器10が音を出力しないマナーモードが含まれている。子供9が自宅内に存在する場合に、電子機器10の動作モードがマナーモードに設定されていると、子供9は、親等の携帯電話機からの電子機器10宛の連絡に気が付かない可能性がある。
<Ninth example>
The operation mode of the electronic device 10 includes a manner mode in which the electronic device 10 does not output sound. If the child 9 is present at home and the operation mode of the electronic device 10 is set to the manner mode, the child 9 may not be aware of the communication to the electronic device 10 from the cellular phone such as the parent. .
 そこで、本例では、子供9の自宅内のアクセスポイントが送信するネットワーク名が登録ネットワーク名として電子機器10の記憶部103に登録される。そして、電子機器10の動作モードがマナーモードに設定されている場合に、屋内特定部420が「屋内」と判定すると、電子機器10はマナーモードを解除する。これにより、マナーモードに設定された電子機器10を有する子供9が帰宅したときには、電子機器10ではマナーモードが解除される可能性が高くなる。よって、自宅にいる子供9は、親等の携帯電話機からの電子機器10宛の連絡(例えば、音声通話あるいはeメールなどによる連絡)に気が付く可能性が向上する。よって、電子機器10の利便性が向上する。 Therefore, in this example, the network name transmitted by the access point in the home of the child 9 is registered in the storage unit 103 of the electronic device 10 as the registered network name. When the operation mode of the electronic device 10 is set to the manner mode, if the indoor identifying unit 420 determines “indoor”, the electronic device 10 cancels the manner mode. Thereby, when the child 9 having the electronic device 10 set in the manner mode returns home, the electronic device 10 is more likely to be released from the manner mode. Therefore, the possibility that the child 9 at home notices contact (for example, contact by voice call or e-mail) from the parent mobile phone to the electronic device 10 is improved. Therefore, the convenience of the electronic device 10 is improved.
 上記の例では、図6のフローチャートにおいて、ステップs2でYESと判定された後に、停止判定処理(ステップs61及びステップs62)、充電判定処理(ステップs71)、家電関連判定処理(ステップs81)、鍵開判定処理(ステップs91)、鍵開閉判定処理(ステップs91及びステップs92)、ドア開判定処理(ステップs101)、ドア開閉判定処理(ステップs101及びステップs102)、温度判定処理(ステップs111及びステップs112)及び湿度判定処理(ステップs121及びステップs122)のいずれか一つが実行されていた。 In the above example, in the flowchart of FIG. 6, after it is determined as YES in step s2, the stop determination process (step s61 and step s62), the charge determination process (step s71), the home appliance related determination process (step s81), the key Open determination process (step s91), key open / close determination process (step s91 and step s92), door open determination process (step s101), door open / close determination process (step s101 and step s102), temperature determination process (step s111 and step s112) ) And humidity determination processing (steps s121 and s122).
 しかしながら、図6のフローチャートにおいて、ステップs2でYESと判定された後に、停止判定処理、充電判定処理、家電関連判定処理、温度判定処理及び湿度判定処理の少なくとも2つの判定処理が実行されてもよい。また図6のフローチャートにおいて、停止判定処理、充電判定処理、家電関連判定処理、温度判定処理及び湿度判定処理の少なくとも一つの処理と、鍵開判定処理、鍵開閉判定処理、ドア開判定処理及びドア開閉判定処理のいずれか一つの処理とが実行されてもよい。 However, in the flowchart of FIG. 6, at least two determination processes of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process may be performed after determining YES in step s2. . In the flowchart of FIG. 6, at least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance-related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process, a key opening determination process, a key opening / closing determination process, a door opening determination process, and a door Any one of the open / close determination processes may be executed.
 また図17のフローチャートにおいて、停止判定処理、充電判定処理、家電関連判定処理、温度判定処理及び湿度判定処理の少なくとも一つの処理が実行されてもよい。この場合には、例えば、ステップs41においてYESと判定された後に当該少なくとも一つの処理が実行される。また図17のフローチャートにおいて、停止判定処理、充電判定処理、家電関連判定処理、温度判定処理及び湿度判定処理の少なくとも一つの処理と、鍵開判定処理、鍵開閉判定処理、ドア開判定処理及びドア開閉判定処理のいずれか一つの処理とが実行されてもよい。この場合には、例えば、ステップs41においてYESと判定された後に、停止判定処理、充電判定処理、家電関連判定処理、温度判定処理及び湿度判定処理の少なくとも一つの処理と、鍵開判定処理、鍵開閉判定処理、ドア開判定処理及びドア開閉判定処理のいずれか一つの処理とが実行される。 In the flowchart of FIG. 17, at least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process may be executed. In this case, for example, at least one process is executed after YES is determined in step s41. In the flowchart of FIG. 17, at least one of stop determination processing, charge determination processing, home appliance related determination processing, temperature determination processing, and humidity determination processing, key opening determination processing, key opening / closing determination processing, door opening determination processing, and door Any one of the open / close determination processes may be executed. In this case, for example, after determining YES in step s41, at least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance-related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process, a key opening determination process, and a key One of the opening / closing determination process, the door opening determination process, and the door opening / closing determination process is executed.
 また図18のフローチャートにおいて、停止判定処理、充電判定処理、家電関連判定処理、温度判定処理及び湿度判定処理の少なくとも一つの処理が実行されてもよい。この場合には、例えば、ステップs52においてYESと判定された後に当該少なくとも一つの処理が実行される。また図18のフローチャートにおいて、停止判定処理、充電判定処理、家電関連判定処理、温度判定処理及び湿度判定処理の少なくとも一つの処理と、鍵開判定処理、鍵開閉判定処理、ドア開判定処理及びドア開閉判定処理のいずれか一つの処理とが実行されてもよい。この場合には、例えば、ステップs52においてYESと判定された後に、停止判定処理、充電判定処理、家電関連判定処理、温度判定処理及び湿度判定処理の少なくとも一つの処理と、鍵開判定処理、鍵開閉判定処理、ドア開判定処理及びドア開閉判定処理のいずれか一つの処理とが実行される。 In the flowchart of FIG. 18, at least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process may be executed. In this case, for example, at least one process is executed after YES is determined in step s52. In the flowchart of FIG. 18, at least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance-related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process, a key opening determination process, a key opening / closing determination process, a door opening determination process, and a door Any one of the open / close determination processes may be executed. In this case, for example, after determining YES in step s52, at least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance-related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process, a key opening determination process, and a key One of the opening / closing determination process, the door opening determination process, and the door opening / closing determination process is executed.
 また図19のフローチャートにおいて、停止判定処理、充電判定処理、家電関連判定処理、温度判定処理及び湿度判定処理の少なくとも一つの処理が実行されてもよい。この場合には、例えば、ステップs41においてYESと判定された後に当該少なくとも一つの処理が実行される。また図19のフローチャートにおいて、停止判定処理、充電判定処理、家電関連判定処理、温度判定処理及び湿度判定処理の少なくとも一つの処理と、鍵開判定処理、鍵開閉判定処理、ドア開判定処理及びドア開閉判定処理のいずれか一つの処理とが実行されてもよい。この場合には、例えば、ステップs41においてYESと判定された後に、停止判定処理、充電判定処理、家電関連判定処理、温度判定処理及び湿度判定処理の少なくとも一つの処理と、鍵開判定処理、鍵開閉判定処理、ドア開判定処理及びドア開閉判定処理のいずれか一つの処理とが実行される。 In the flowchart of FIG. 19, at least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process may be executed. In this case, for example, at least one process is executed after YES is determined in step s41. In the flowchart of FIG. 19, at least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance-related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process, a key opening determination process, a key opening / closing determination process, a door opening determination process, and a door Any one of the open / close determination processes may be executed. In this case, for example, after determining YES in step s41, at least one of a stop determination process, a charge determination process, a home appliance-related determination process, a temperature determination process, and a humidity determination process, a key opening determination process, and a key One of the opening / closing determination process, the door opening determination process, and the door opening / closing determination process is executed.
 図31は、図19のフローチャートにおいて、停止判定処理、充電判定処理、家電関連判定処理、温度判定処理及び湿度判定処理のすべてと、鍵開判定処理とが実行される場合の屋内特定関連処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。図19のステップs1、ステップs51、ステップs2、ステップs52及びステップs41が実行され、ステップs41においてYESと判定されると、ステップs201において、制御部100は停止判定処理(ステップs61及びステップs62)を実行する。停止判定処理のステップs62においてYESと判定されるとステップs3が実行される。ステップs3が実行されると、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。一方で、ステップs62においてNOと判定されると、制御部100はステップs202において鍵開判定処理(ステップs91)を行う。 FIG. 31 is a flowchart of FIG. 19 illustrating the indoor identification related process when the stop determination process, the charge determination process, the home appliance related determination process, the temperature determination process, the humidity determination process, and the key opening determination process are executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example. Steps s1, s51, s2, s52, and s41 in FIG. 19 are executed. If YES is determined in step s41, the control unit 100 performs a stop determination process (steps s61 and s62) in step s201. Execute. If it is determined YES in step s62 of the stop determination process, step s3 is executed. When step s3 is executed, the indoor identification related process ends. On the other hand, if NO is determined in step s62, the control unit 100 performs a key opening determination process (step s91) in step s202.
 鍵開判定処理のステップs91においてYESと判定されるとステップs3が実行される。一方で、ステップs91においてNOと判定されると、制御部100はステップs203において温度判定処理(ステップs111及びステップs112)を行う。温度判定処理のステップs111及びステップs112の両方でYESと判定されるとステップs3が実行される。一方で、温度判定処理のステップs111及びステップs112のいずれかでNOと判定されると、制御部100はステップs204において湿度判定処理(ステップs121及びステップs122)を行う。 If it is determined YES in step s91 of the key opening determination process, step s3 is executed. On the other hand, if NO is determined in step s91, the control unit 100 performs a temperature determination process (steps s111 and s112) in step s203. If it is determined YES in both step s111 and step s112 of the temperature determination process, step s3 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined NO in either step s111 or step s112 of the temperature determination process, the control unit 100 performs a humidity determination process (step s121 and step s122) in step s204.
 湿度判定処理のステップs121及びステップs122の両方でYESと判定されるとステップs3が実行される。一方で、湿度判定処理のステップs121及びステップs122のいずれかでNOと判定されると、制御部100はステップs205において充電判定処理(ステップs71)を行う。充電判定処理のステップs71においてYESと判定されるとステップs3が実行される。一方で、ステップs71においてNOと判定されると、制御部100はステップs206において家電関連判定処理(ステップs81)を行う。家電関連判定処理のステップs81においてYESと判定されるとステップs3が実行される。一方で、ステップs81においてNOと判定されると、屋内特定関連処理が終了する。 If YES is determined in both steps s121 and s122 of the humidity determination process, step s3 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined NO in any of steps s121 and s122 of the humidity determination process, the control unit 100 performs a charge determination process (step s71) in step s205. If it is determined YES in step s71 of the charging determination process, step s3 is executed. On the other hand, if it determines with NO in step s71, the control part 100 will perform household appliance related determination processing (step s81) in step s206. If it is determined YES in step s81 of the home appliance related determination process, step s3 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined as NO in step s81, the indoor identification related process ends.
 なお、ステップs201~s206の実行順序は上記の限りではない。また、ステップs201~s206の少なくとも一つの処理は実行されなくてもよい。またステップs202において、鍵開閉判定処理が実行されてもよい。この場合には、鍵開閉判定処理のステップs91及びステップs92の両方でYESと判定されるとステップs3が実行される。一方で、ステップs91及びステップs92のいずれかでNOと判定されるとステップs203が実行される。またステップs202において、ドア開判定処理が実行されてもよい。この場合には、ドア開判定処理のステップs101でYESと判定されるとステップs3が実行される。一方で、ステップs101でNOと判定されるとステップs203が実行される。またステップs202において、ドア開判定処理が実行されてもよい。この場合には、ドア開閉判定処理のステップs101及びステップs102の両方でYESと判定されるとステップs3が実行される。一方で、ステップs101及びステップs102のいずれかでNOと判定されるとステップs203が実行される。 The execution order of steps s201 to s206 is not limited to the above. Further, at least one process of steps s201 to s206 may not be executed. In step s202, a key opening / closing determination process may be executed. In this case, if YES is determined in both step s91 and step s92 of the key opening / closing determination process, step s3 is executed. On the other hand, if NO is determined in either step s91 or step s92, step s203 is executed. In step s202, a door open determination process may be executed. In this case, if YES is determined in step s101 of the door open determination process, step s3 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined as NO in step s101, step s203 is executed. In step s202, a door open determination process may be executed. In this case, if YES is determined in both step s101 and step s102 of the door opening / closing determination process, step s3 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined NO in either step s101 or step s102, step s203 is executed.
 また上記の例では、無線LANでのネットワーク名が使用されて屋内特定が行われていた。しかしながら、ネットワーク名と同様に、無線通信部110が無線通信することが可能な通信装置が、当該通信装置に割り当てられた、その内容を変更することが可能な識別情報を送信する場合には、ネットワーク名の代りに当該識別情報を用いて同様に屋内特定を行うことができる。 In the above example, the indoor identification is performed using the network name in the wireless LAN. However, in the same way as the network name, when a communication device capable of wireless communication by the wireless communication unit 110 transmits identification information assigned to the communication device and capable of changing its contents, Indoor identification can be similarly performed using the identification information instead of the network name.
 また上記の例では、無線LANでのネットワーク名が使用されて屋内特定が行われていたが、ネットワーク名の代りにBSSIDが使用されてもよい。この場合であっても、ユーザ9が屋内に存在することを適切に特定することができる。 In the above example, the network name in the wireless LAN is used to identify indoors, but the BSSID may be used instead of the network name. Even in this case, it is possible to appropriately specify that the user 9 exists indoors.
 また上記の例では、電子機器10は、スマートフォン等の携帯電話機であったが、他の種類の電子機器であってよい。電子機器10は、例えば、タブレット端末、パーソナルコンピュータ、ウェアラブル機器などであってよい。電子機器10として採用されるウェアラブル機器は、リストバンド型あるいは腕時計型などの腕に装着するタイプであってもよいし、ヘッドバンド型あるいはメガネ型などの頭に装着するタイプであってもよいし、服型などの体に装着するタイプであってもよい。 In the above example, the electronic device 10 is a mobile phone such as a smartphone, but may be another type of electronic device. The electronic device 10 may be a tablet terminal, a personal computer, a wearable device, or the like, for example. The wearable device employed as the electronic device 10 may be a wristband type or wristwatch type that is worn on the arm, or a headband type or glasses type that is worn on the head. It may also be a type that is worn on the body, such as a clothing type.
 以上のように、電子機器10は詳細に説明されたが、上記した説明は、全ての局面において例示であって、この開示がそれに限定されるものではない。また、上述した各種例は、相互に矛盾しない限り組み合わせて適用可能である。そして、例示されていない無数の例が、この開示の範囲から外れることなく想定され得るものと解される。 As described above, the electronic device 10 has been described in detail, but the above description is an example in all aspects, and the disclosure is not limited thereto. The various examples described above can be applied in combination as long as they do not contradict each other. And it is understood that countless examples not illustrated can be assumed without departing from the scope of this disclosure.
 10 電子機器
 103 記憶部
 100 制御部(制御装置)
 110 無線通信部
 410 停止移動特定部
 420 屋内特定部
 430 位置判定部
 500 識別情報判定部
 600 通知決定部
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Electronic device 103 Memory | storage part 100 Control part (control apparatus)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 110 Wireless communication part 410 Stop movement specific part 420 Indoor specific part 430 Position determination part 500 Identification information determination part 600 Notification determination part

Claims (22)

  1.  電子機器であって、
     無線通信を行う通信部と、
     前記通信部が無線通信することが可能な第1通信装置に割り当てられた、その内容を変更することが可能な第1識別情報を登録識別情報として記憶する記憶部と、
     前記通信部が第2通信装置から受信する、当該第2通信装置に割り当てられた前記第1識別情報である受信識別情報と、前記登録識別情報とが一致するか否かを判定する第1判定部と、
     前記第1判定部での第1判定結果に基づいて、前記電子機器のユーザが屋内に存在することを特定する屋内特定を行う屋内特定部と
    を備える、電子機器。
    Electronic equipment,
    A communication unit for performing wireless communication;
    A storage unit that stores, as registered identification information, first identification information that is assigned to a first communication device capable of wireless communication with the communication unit and whose contents can be changed;
    First determination for determining whether the reception identification information, which is the first identification information assigned to the second communication device, received by the communication unit from the second communication device matches the registration identification information. And
    An electronic device comprising: an indoor identification unit that performs indoor identification that identifies that a user of the electronic device is present indoors based on a first determination result in the first determination unit.
  2.  請求項1に記載の電子機器であって、
     前記屋内特定部は、前記第1判定結果と、前記受信識別情報の受信強度とに基づいて、前記屋内特定を行う、電子機器。
    The electronic device according to claim 1,
    The indoor identification unit is an electronic device that performs the indoor identification based on the first determination result and the reception intensity of the reception identification information.
  3.  請求項1及び請求項2のいずれか一つに記載の電子機器であって、
     前記記憶部は、前記第1通信装置の位置あるいは前記通信部が前記第1通信装置から前記登録識別情報を受信するときの前記電子機器の位置を示す位置情報を登録位置情報として記憶し、
     前記第2通信装置の位置あるいは前記通信部が前記第2通信装置から前記受信識別情報を受信するときの前記電子機器の位置が、前記登録位置情報が示す位置から所定範囲内に存在するか否かを判定する第2判定部をさらに備え、
     前記屋内特定部は、前記第1判定結果と、前記第2判定部での第2判定結果とに基づいて、前記屋内特定を行う、電子機器。
    The electronic device according to any one of claims 1 and 2,
    The storage unit stores, as registered position information, position information indicating a position of the first communication device or a position of the electronic device when the communication unit receives the registration identification information from the first communication device.
    Whether the position of the second communication device or the position of the electronic device when the communication unit receives the reception identification information from the second communication device is within a predetermined range from the position indicated by the registered position information A second determination unit for determining whether or not
    The indoor identification unit is an electronic device that performs the indoor identification based on the first determination result and the second determination result of the second determination unit.
  4.  請求項1乃至請求項3のいずれか一つに記載の電子機器であって、
     前記通信部が受信する前記第1識別情報を、前記登録識別情報として前記記憶部に登録することを指示するための前記ユーザの指示操作を受け付ける操作部をさらに備える、電子機器。
    An electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
    An electronic device further comprising an operation unit that receives an instruction operation of the user for instructing to register the first identification information received by the communication unit as the registration identification information in the storage unit.
  5.  請求項1乃至請求項3のいずれか一つに記載の電子機器であって、
     所定の時間帯において前記通信部が受信する前記第1識別情報が、前記登録識別情報として前記記憶部に登録される、電子機器。
    An electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
    The electronic device in which the first identification information received by the communication unit in a predetermined time zone is registered in the storage unit as the registration identification information.
  6.  請求項1乃至請求項3のいずれか一つに記載の電子機器であって、
     前記電子機器が停止しているか否かを判定する第3判定部をさらに備え、
     前記第3判定部で前記電子機器が停止していると判定されるときに前記通信部が受信する前記識別情報が、前記登録識別情報として前記記憶部に登録される、電子機器。
    An electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
    A third determination unit for determining whether or not the electronic device is stopped;
    The electronic device in which the identification information received by the communication unit when the third determination unit determines that the electronic device is stopped is registered in the storage unit as the registration identification information.
  7.  請求項1乃至請求項5のいずれか一つに記載の電子機器であって、
     前記電子機器がユーザに所持されずに置かれているか否かを判定する第3判定部をさらに備え、
     前記屋内特定部は、前記第1判定結果と、前記第3判定部での第3判定結果とに基づいて、前記屋内特定を行う、電子機器。
    An electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
    A third determination unit for determining whether the electronic device is placed without being possessed by the user;
    The indoor identification unit is an electronic device that performs the indoor identification based on the first determination result and the third determination result of the third determination unit.
  8.  請求項1乃至請求項7のいずれか一つに記載の電子機器であって、
     前記電子機器が充電中か否かを判定する第4判定部をさらに備え、
     前記屋内特定部は、前記第1判定結果と、前記第4判定部での第4判定結果とに基づいて、前記屋内特定を行う、電子機器。
    An electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
    A fourth determination unit for determining whether or not the electronic device is being charged;
    The indoor identification unit is an electronic device that performs the indoor identification based on the first determination result and the fourth determination result in the fourth determination unit.
  9.  請求項1乃至請求項8のいずれか一つに記載の電子機器であって、
     前記屋内特定部は、前記第1判定結果と、前記通信部が家電機器から受信する第1情報とに基づいて、前記屋内特定を行う、電子機器。
    An electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
    The indoor identification unit is an electronic device that performs the indoor identification based on the first determination result and the first information that the communication unit receives from the home appliance.
  10.  請求項1乃至請求項9のいずれか一つに記載の電子機器であって、
     前記第1情報には、前記家電機器に割り当てられた第2識別情報、前記家電機器の電源がオンにされたことを示す第2情報、前記家電機器のドアが開かれたことを示す第3情報、前記家電機器が有するセンサが人を検出したことを示す第4情報及び前記家電機器が有する発光部が点灯されたことを示す第5情報のいずれか一つを含む、電子機器。
    An electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
    The first information includes second identification information assigned to the home appliance, second information indicating that the power of the home appliance is turned on, and third indicating that the door of the home appliance is opened. An electronic device including any one of information, 4th information which shows that the sensor which the household appliance has has detected a person, and the 5th information which shows that the light emission part which the household appliance has was turned on.
  11.  請求項1乃至請求項10のいずれか一つに記載の電子機器であって、
     建物のドアの鍵が開けられたか否かを判定する第5判定部をさらに備え、
     前記屋内特定部は、前記第1判定結果と、前記第5判定部での第5判定結果とに基づいて、前記屋内特定を行う、電子機器。
    The electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 10,
    A fifth determination unit for determining whether or not the door of the building has been unlocked;
    The indoor identification unit is an electronic device that performs the indoor identification based on the first determination result and the fifth determination result in the fifth determination unit.
  12.  請求項11に記載の電子機器であって、
     前記鍵が閉められたか否かを判定する第6判定部をさらに備え、
     前記屋内特定部は、前記第1判定結果と、前記第5判定結果と、前記第6判定部での第6判定結果とに基づいて、前記屋内特定を行う、電子機器。
    The electronic device according to claim 11,
    A sixth determination unit for determining whether or not the key is closed;
    The said indoor identification part is an electronic device which performs the said indoor identification based on the said 1st determination result, the said 5th determination result, and the 6th determination result in the said 6th determination part.
  13.  請求項1乃至請求項10のいずれか一つに記載の電子機器であって、
     建物のドアが開けられたか否かを判定する第5判定部をさらに備え、
     前記屋内特定部は、前記第1判定結果と、前記第5判定部での第5判定結果とに基づいて、前記屋内特定を行う、電子機器。
    The electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 10,
    A fifth determination unit for determining whether the door of the building has been opened;
    The indoor identification unit is an electronic device that performs the indoor identification based on the first determination result and the fifth determination result in the fifth determination unit.
  14.  請求項13に記載の電子機器であって、
     前記建物の前記ドアが閉められたか否かを判定する第6判定部をさらに備え、
     前記屋内特定部は、前記第1判定結果と、前記第5判定結果と、前記第6判定部での第6判定結果とに基づいて、前記屋内特定を行う、電子機器。
    The electronic device according to claim 13,
    A sixth determination unit for determining whether or not the door of the building is closed;
    The said indoor identification part is an electronic device which performs the said indoor identification based on the said 1st determination result, the said 5th determination result, and the 6th determination result in the said 6th determination part.
  15.  請求項1乃至請求項14のいずれか一つに記載の電子機器であって、
     前記電子機器の温度である第1温度を検出する温度検出部と、
     前記第1温度と、前記通信部が受信する、建物内の温度である第2温度とを比較する第1比較部と
    を備え、
     前記屋内特定部は、前記第1判定結果と、前記第1比較部での第1比較結果とに基いて、前記屋内特定を行う、電子機器。
    The electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
    A temperature detector that detects a first temperature that is a temperature of the electronic device;
    A first comparison unit that compares the first temperature with a second temperature that is received by the communication unit and that is a temperature inside the building;
    The indoor identification unit is an electronic device that performs the indoor identification based on the first determination result and the first comparison result in the first comparison unit.
  16.  請求項1乃至請求項15のいずれか一つに記載の電子機器であって、
     前記電子機器の周囲の湿度である第1湿度を検出する湿度検出部と、
     前記第1湿度と、前記通信部が受信する、建物内の湿度である第2湿度とを比較する第2比較部と
    を備え、
     前記屋内特定部は、前記第1判定結果と、前記第2比較部での第2比較結果とに基いて、前記屋内特定を行う、電子機器。
    The electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 15,
    A humidity detector for detecting a first humidity which is a humidity around the electronic device;
    A second comparison unit that compares the first humidity and a second humidity that is received by the communication unit and is a humidity in a building;
    The indoor identification unit is an electronic device that performs the indoor identification based on the first determination result and the second comparison result of the second comparison unit.
  17.  請求項1乃至請求項16のいずれか一つに記載の電子機器であって、
     前記屋内特定の結果に基づいて、前記電子機器の外部に前記電子機器が通知を行うか否かを決定する通知決定部をさらに備える、電子機器。
    The electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 16,
    An electronic device, further comprising: a notification determination unit that determines whether or not the electronic device performs notification outside the electronic device based on the indoor specific result.
  18.  請求項1乃至請求項16のいずれか一つに記載の電子機器であって、
     前記ユーザが屋内に存在することを前記屋内特定部が特定すると、前記通信部は前記電子機器の外部に通知を行う、電子機器。
    The electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 16,
    When the indoor specifying unit specifies that the user exists indoors, the communication unit notifies the outside of the electronic device.
  19.  請求項1乃至請求項17のいずれか一つに記載の電子機器であって、
     前記電子機器の動作モードには、前記電子機器が音を出力しないモードが含まれ、
     前記屋内特定では、前記ユーザが自宅内に存在することが特定され、
     前記動作モードが前記モードである場合に、前記ユーザが前記自宅内に存在することを前記屋内特定部が特定すると、前記モードが解除される、電子機器。
    An electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 17,
    The operation mode of the electronic device includes a mode in which the electronic device does not output sound,
    In the indoor identification, it is specified that the user exists in the home,
    An electronic device in which, when the operation mode is the mode, the mode is canceled when the indoor specifying unit specifies that the user exists in the home.
  20.  無線通信を行う電子機器が備える、当該電子機器の動作を制御する制御装置であって、
     前記電子機器に登録された、当該電子機器が無線通信を行うことが可能な第1通信装置に割り当てられた、その内容を変更することが可能な識別情報である登録識別情報と、前記電子機器が無線通信で第2通信装置から受信する、当該第2通信装置に割り当てられた前記識別情報である受信識別情報とが一致するか否かを判定する判定部と、
     前記判定部での判定結果に基づいて、前記電子機器のユーザが屋内に存在することを特定する屋内特定を行う屋内特定部と
    を備える、制御装置。
    A control device for controlling the operation of the electronic device provided in the electronic device performing wireless communication,
    Registered identification information that is registered in the electronic device and is assigned to the first communication device that is capable of wireless communication with the electronic device and whose contents can be changed, and the electronic device A determination unit that determines whether or not the reception identification information that is the identification information assigned to the second communication device is received by the wireless communication from the second communication device;
    A control apparatus provided with the indoor specific part which performs indoor specific which specifies that the user of the said electronic device exists indoors based on the determination result in the said determination part.
  21.  無線通信を行う電子機器を制御するための制御プログラムであって、
     前記電子機器に、
     前記電子機器に登録された、当該電子機器が無線通信を行うことが可能な第1通信装置に割り当てられた、その内容を変更することが可能な識別情報である登録識別情報と、前記電子機器が無線通信で第2通信装置から受信する、当該第2通信装置に割り当てられた前記識別情報である受信識別情報とが一致するか否かを判定する第1工程と、
     前記第1工程での判定結果に基づいて、前記電子機器のユーザが屋内に存在することを特定する屋内特定を行う第2工程と
    を実行させるための制御プログラム。
    A control program for controlling an electronic device that performs wireless communication,
    In the electronic device,
    Registered identification information that is registered in the electronic device and is assigned to the first communication device that is capable of wireless communication with the electronic device and whose contents can be changed, and the electronic device A first step of determining whether or not the reception identification information, which is the identification information assigned to the second communication device, is received from the second communication device by wireless communication,
    A control program for executing a second step of performing indoor identification that identifies that the user of the electronic device is present indoors based on the determination result in the first step.
  22.  無線通信を行う電子機器の動作方法であって、
     前記電子機器に登録された、当該電子機器が無線通信を行うことが可能な第1通信装置に割り当てられた、その内容を変更することが可能な識別情報である登録識別情報と、前記電子機器が無線通信で第2通信装置から受信する、当該第2通信装置に割り当てられた前記識別情報である受信識別情報とが一致するか否かを判定する第1工程と、
     前記第1工程での判定結果に基づいて、前記電子機器のユーザが屋内に存在することを特定する屋内特定を行う第2工程と
    を備える、電子機器の動作方法。
    An operation method of an electronic device performing wireless communication,
    Registered identification information that is registered in the electronic device and is assigned to the first communication device that is capable of wireless communication with the electronic device and whose contents can be changed, and the electronic device A first step of determining whether or not the reception identification information, which is the identification information assigned to the second communication device, is received from the second communication device by wireless communication,
    An electronic device operating method comprising: a second step of performing indoor identification that identifies that a user of the electronic device is present indoors based on a determination result in the first step.
PCT/JP2017/040518 2016-11-25 2017-11-10 Electronic device, control device, control program, and operation method of electronic device WO2018096942A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201780071461.XA CN109964472A (en) 2016-11-25 2017-11-10 Electronic equipment, control device, the method for operating for controlling program and electronic equipment
EP17873590.8A EP3528479A4 (en) 2016-11-25 2017-11-10 Electronic device, control device, control program, and operation method of electronic device
US16/418,666 US11460303B2 (en) 2016-11-25 2019-05-21 Electronic apparatus, control device, and operation method of electronic apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2016229120 2016-11-25
JP2016-229120 2016-11-25
JP2017058103A JP6713943B2 (en) 2016-11-25 2017-03-23 Electronic device, control device, control program, and operating method of electronic device
JP2017-058103 2017-03-23

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/418,666 Continuation US11460303B2 (en) 2016-11-25 2019-05-21 Electronic apparatus, control device, and operation method of electronic apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018096942A1 true WO2018096942A1 (en) 2018-05-31

Family

ID=62195867

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2017/040518 WO2018096942A1 (en) 2016-11-25 2017-11-10 Electronic device, control device, control program, and operation method of electronic device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2018096942A1 (en)

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009188771A (en) * 2008-02-06 2009-08-20 Nec Corp Communication apparatus, firewall control method, and firewall control program
JP2010250680A (en) * 2009-04-17 2010-11-04 Adachi Shokai:Kk At-home determining system, at-home determining device, and at-home determining method
JP2011049931A (en) * 2009-08-28 2011-03-10 Nec Commun Syst Ltd Radio communication terminal
JP2014508285A (en) * 2011-01-11 2014-04-03 クゥアルコム・インコーポレイテッド Positioning system using optical information
JP2014123847A (en) * 2012-12-20 2014-07-03 Funai Electric Co Ltd Mobile phone
JP2016005228A (en) * 2014-06-19 2016-01-12 三菱電機株式会社 Terminal device and radio device
JP2016519756A (en) * 2013-03-14 2016-07-07 クゥアルコム・インコーポレイテッドQualcomm Incorporated Positioning based on signals injected into the hidden infrastructure
JP2016158118A (en) * 2015-02-25 2016-09-01 Necプラットフォームズ株式会社 Communication device, communication system, communication method, and program

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009188771A (en) * 2008-02-06 2009-08-20 Nec Corp Communication apparatus, firewall control method, and firewall control program
JP2010250680A (en) * 2009-04-17 2010-11-04 Adachi Shokai:Kk At-home determining system, at-home determining device, and at-home determining method
JP2011049931A (en) * 2009-08-28 2011-03-10 Nec Commun Syst Ltd Radio communication terminal
JP2014508285A (en) * 2011-01-11 2014-04-03 クゥアルコム・インコーポレイテッド Positioning system using optical information
JP2014123847A (en) * 2012-12-20 2014-07-03 Funai Electric Co Ltd Mobile phone
JP2016519756A (en) * 2013-03-14 2016-07-07 クゥアルコム・インコーポレイテッドQualcomm Incorporated Positioning based on signals injected into the hidden infrastructure
JP2016005228A (en) * 2014-06-19 2016-01-12 三菱電機株式会社 Terminal device and radio device
JP2016158118A (en) * 2015-02-25 2016-09-01 Necプラットフォームズ株式会社 Communication device, communication system, communication method, and program

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP3528479A4 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11460303B2 (en) Electronic apparatus, control device, and operation method of electronic apparatus
CN108834068B (en) Positioning method based on wearable device and wearable device
CN105101404B (en) Localization method, device and terminal
CN109716796B (en) Wireless device attribute communication with privacy indication
KR101898101B1 (en) IOT interaction system
KR101880715B1 (en) Method and apparatus for notifying bus passengers
CN106412827A (en) Positioning method and device
WO2014155851A1 (en) Location estimation device, lo cation estimation method, terminal of concern, communication method, communication terminal, recording medium, and location estimation system
KR101637378B1 (en) Missing child preventing system using wearable Bluetooth device
JP2018004333A (en) Positioning system, positioning method, and positioning program
KR20160092120A (en) System for guiding parking position
EP3225510B1 (en) Methods and devices for controlling self-balanced vehicle to park
JP6706406B2 (en) Mobile devices, systems and programs
EP3462424B1 (en) Method and device for mobile illumination, and storage medium
CN110675566A (en) Sharing method and terminal of air conditioner, shared air conditioner and storage medium
US10645535B2 (en) Electronic apparatus, control device and computer-readable non-transitory recording medium for selectively transmitting information based on indoor/outdoor specification
CN107835304B (en) Method and device for controlling mobile terminal, mobile terminal and storage medium
JPWO2017221301A1 (en) Control system
JP6655526B2 (en) Electronic device, control device, control program, and operation method of electronic device
WO2018096942A1 (en) Electronic device, control device, control program, and operation method of electronic device
US10812950B2 (en) Electronic apparatus, control device, computer-readable non-transitory recording medium and operation method of electronic apparatus
JP7422419B2 (en) Mobile devices, remote control devices, systems and programs
JP6777743B2 (en) Electronic devices, control programs and operating methods of electronic devices
TWI624813B (en) Sos method, system, and device
CN105472726A (en) Position determination method and device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17873590

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2017873590

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20190517

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE